ARCHITECTURAL

SPECIFICATION

CONSTRUCTION OF A LEVEL 1 HOSPITAL,

FELIPE ABRIGO MEMORIAL HOSPITAL (FAMH)

Guiuan, Eastern Samar

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities

01 60 00 Product Requirements

01 74 23 Final Cleaning

01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data

03 15 13 Waterstops

03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete

03 32 00 Concrete Topping

03 35 00 Concrete Finishing

04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry

05 50 00 Metal Fabrication

07 13 16 Crystalline Waterproofing

07 13 26 Self- Adhering Sheet Waterproofing

07 16 00 Flexible Cementitious Type Waterproofing

07 21 00 Thermal Insulation

07 22 16 Roof Board Insulation

07 84 00 Fire Stopping

07 84 20 Fire Resistive Joints

07 92 00 Joint Sealants

08 11 19 Stainless Steel Doors and Frames

08 14 00 Wood Doors

08 42 43 Intensive Care-Critical Gate Entrances

08 51 13 Aluminum Windows

08 53 13 Vinyl PVC Windows

08 63 00 Metal Framed Skylights

08 71 00 Finish Hardware

08 80 00 Glazing

08 81 13 Decorative Glass Glazing

08 90 00 Louvers and Vents

09 24 00 Cement Plastering

09 29 00 Gypsum Board

09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling

09 65 16 Resilient Sheet Flooring

09 65 36 Static-Control Resilient Flooring

09 91 00 Painting

10 21 13 Toilet Compartments

10 21 23 Cubicles

10 28 13 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories

12 32 00 Manufactured Casework

12 35 53 Laboratory Caseworks

12 35 70 Healthcare Casework

12 36 61 Simulated Stone Countertops

12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames

13 49 00 Radiation Protection
22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures

22 43 00 Healthcare Plumbing Fixtures

26 50 00 Lighting

31 31 16 Termite Control

32 14 40 Stone Paving

32 90 00 Planting Ceiling Tiles

Pre-painted Roofing Sheets

Typhoon-proof Window Shutter

Wall Protection System

 Section 01 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 01 50 00
Temporary Facilities
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division-1 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for temporary services and facilities, including
utilities, construction and support facilities, security and protection, subject to the
approval of the authorized person on the site.

B. Temporary utilities required include but are not limited to:

1. Water service and distribution.
2. Temporary electric power and light.
3. Telephone service.
4. Storm and sanitary sewer.
C. Temporary construction and support facilities required include but are not limited to:
1. Field offices and storage sheds.
2. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.
3. Dewatering facilities and drains.
4. Temporary enclosures.
5. Temporary Project identification signs and bulletin boards.
6. Waste disposal services.
7. Rodent and pest control.
8. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
D. Security and protection facilities required include but are not limited to:
1. Temporary fire protection.
2. Barricades, warning signs, lights.
3. Sidewalks bridge or enclosure fence for the site.
4. Environmental protection.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Temporary Utilities: Submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of
each temporary utility within 15 days of the date established for commencement of the
work.

P a g e | 1 of 7
 Section 01 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction, including but not limited to:
1. Building Code requirements.
2. Health and Safety Regulations.
3. Utility Company Regulations.
4. Police, Fire Departments and Rescue Squad.
5. Environmental Protection Regulations.
B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, “Building Construction and Demolition
Operations,” ANSI-A10 Series standards for “Safety Requirements for Construction and
Demolition,” NECA Electrical Design Library “temporary Electrical Facilities,” and
applicable Local Codes.
C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities to have jurisdiction to inspect and test each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each
temporary utility. At the earliest possible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change
over from the use of temporary service to use of the permanent service.
B. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe
and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload
facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous,
unsanitary conditions, public nuisances to develop or persist on the site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the authorized person on the site, previously
used equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide equipment suitable for
the use intended.
B. Water Hoses: Provide 19.05 mm (3/4") heavy-duty, abrasion resistant, flexible rubber
hoses 30.49 m (100 ft.) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of
the water distribution system; provide adjustable shut-off nozzles at hose discharge.
C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent
insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets
equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for
connection of power tools and equipment.
D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use "hard-service" cords
where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect
separate lengths of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas where
construction activities are in progress.

P a g e | 2 of 7
 Section 01 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage
required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures,
where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures were exposed to moisture.
F. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built
construction with lockable entrances, operable windows and serviceable finishes.
Provide air-conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading.
G. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained single-occupant toilet units of the
chemical, aerated re-circulation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed
with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material, or as
otherwise approved by the Owner and authorized person on the site.
H. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations.
I. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class "A" fire extinguishers
for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations provide hand-carried,
portable, UL-rated, class "ABC" dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of
extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for the exposures.
J. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and size required by
location and class of fire exposure.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Use qualified personnel for the installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities
where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as
required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by
authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where the company
provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible
materials and equipment; comply with the company's recommendations.
B. Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
1. Obtain water within the building at point where permanent or temporary
connections are indicated to be made, or at a joint approved by the authorized
person on the site.
C. Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of
sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include
meters, transformers, overload protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault
interrupters and main distribution switchgear.

P a g e | 3 of 7
 Section 01 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Except where overhead service must be used, install electric power service
underground.
2. Obtain temporary power within the area to be constructed. Cost of electricity
will be paid by the Owner.
D. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection
requirements, without operating the entire system, and will provide adequate
illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.
E. Provide temporary telephone service in the area to be constructed or area designated
as field office throughout the construction period; post a list of important telephone
numbers at each telephone.
F. If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be
discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage
ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds and similar facilities as approved by the Owner. If
neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent,
provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off the site in a lawful manner, as
per Owner's approval.
1. Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils and
similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways discharge.
2. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary
condition. Following heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly.
G. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and sub-
grade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by run-off of storm water from heavy
rains.

3.3 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities and other temporary construction
and support facilities for easy access.
B. Use a designated place as directed by the authorized person on the site within the
project area.
1. Maintain temporary construction and support facilities until near Substantial
Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after
Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under
conditions acceptable to the Owner.
C. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops and sheds located within the
construction area. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241.
D. Provide weather tight temporary offices of sufficient size to accommodate required
office personnel at the Project site. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small
progress meetings.
E. Install storage and fabrication sheds, sized, furnished and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may be
open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building or elsewhere on the site.

P a g e | 4 of 7
 Section 01 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

F. For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated
with construction activities included under individual instructions, comply with
Consultant's requirements, as approved by the Owner. Where feasible, utilize the same
facilities. Maintain the site, excavations and construction free of water.
G. Provide temporary enclosure for protection of construction in progress and completed,
from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations and similar activities.
1. Provide all temporary enclosures around pits, open shafts, etc., and take all
other necessary and required precautions to protect life and property, dictated
by all laws and prudence.
2. Protect all finished work and properly store all materials and equipment.
3. Comply with Occupational Safety and Health (OSHA) Regulations.
4. Provide dust-tight barriers between the construction area and other parts of
the facility that should remain in normal operation.
5. Erect and maintain all necessary barricades, warning devices, and fences, and
take all precautions that may be necessary to protect the public and construction
personnel from all hazards.
H. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: No sign permitted, except as required for
safety and/or law.
I. Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Continuously keep all areas
clean of trash and debris. Do not hold materials for more than 7 days during normal
weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F (27
degrees C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately
from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material in a lawful manner.
J. Before deep foundation Work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest
control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of
rodents, roaches and other pests. Employ this service to perform extermination and
control procedures at regular intervals so the Project will be relatively free of pests and
their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations in a lawful manner
using environmentally safe materials.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over
from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until
substantial completion, or longer as requested by the Architect.
B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire protection needs are supplied by permanent
facilities, install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to
protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA
10 “Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers," and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding
Construction, Alterations and Demolition Operations”.
1. Comply with requirements of governing authorities and Owner's insurance
requirements.

P a g e | 5 of 7
 Section 01 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended
purpose.
3. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
4. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary
fire protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires.
Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire exposure areas.
5. Provide supervision of welding operations and similar sources of fire ignition.
C. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for
erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and
warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against.
Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially
completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized
entrance, vandalism, theft and similar violations of security.
1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or
attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection
with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for
theft and vandalism.
E. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and
minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or
polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid using tools and
equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and
equipment to hours that will help minimize complaints from persons or firms near the
site.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of
temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.
B. Parking and Traffic: Obtain approval from Owner and/or its duly authorized
representative for control of construction parking, traffic movement of Contractor's
personnel and operations, and Owner's requirements.
C. Staging Areas: Coordinate with the Owner for the location of construction staging areas
required. D. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until
removal.
E. Termination and Removal: Unless the Project Director requests that it be maintained
longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replaced by
authorized use of a permanent facility, or not later than Substantial Completion.
Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed
because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged work, clean
exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

P a g e | 6 of 7
 Section 01 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the
Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project
identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities that have
been used during the construction period.

-END OF SECTION 01 50 00-

P a g e | 7 of 7
 Section 01 60 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 01 60 00
Product Requirements
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Products.
2. Transportation and Handling.
3. Storage and Protection.
4. General Product Requirements.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Substitutions.
2. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as
specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements,
quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.
C. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place them on sloped supports,
above ground.
D. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when the site does not permit on-site
storage or protection.
E. Cover products subject to deterioration with the impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of product.
F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to
verify Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Semi-Open Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name or more products or
manufacturers, provide one of the products indicated.

P a g e | 1 of 2
 Section 01 60 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name,

accompanied by the term “Approved Substitution”, the authorized person on the
site will allow products as substitutions only after complying with the
requirements of the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.

-END OF SECTION 01 60 00-

P a g e | 2 of 2
 Section 01 78 23
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 01 78 23
Operation and Maintenance Data
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specifications Section shall apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies for the administrative and procedural requirements for operating
and a maintenance manuals including the following:
1. Preparation and submittal of operating and maintenance manuals for building
operating systems or equipment.
2. Preparation and submittal of instruction manuals covering the care,
preservation and maintenance of architectural products and finishes.
3. Instruction of the Owner’s operating personnel in operation and maintenance
of building systems and equipment.
B. Special operating and maintenance data requirements for specific pieces of equipment
or building operating systems are included in the appropriate sections of Division-2.
C. Multiple Prime Contracts: Each prime Contractor shall prepare operating and
maintenance data for its installations.
1. Where operating and maintenance manuals include information on
installations by the Contractor for General Construction and another Contractor,
the Contractor for General Construction shall prepare the manuals, including
collection, collation and binding of the material and submittal of data as
specified.
2. Where operating and maintenance manuals include information on
installations by more than one prime Contractor, other than the Contractor for
General Construction, the Contractor who is the principal source of information,
as determined by the Architect shall receive information furnished by other
Contractors, coordinate, collate, and bind the material into unified manuals, and
submit the manuals, as specified.
3. Where instruction in operating and maintenance procedures on equipment
and systems involves participation of more than one Contractor, the Contractor
who is designated by the Architect as the principal instructor shall coordinate
with the other Contractors for a mutually agreeable time to provide instruction
to the Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel.

P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 01 78 23
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. In preparation of Maintenance Manual, use personnel thoroughly trained and
experienced in operation and maintenance of the equipment or system involved.
1. Where written instructions are required, use personnel skilled in technical
writing to the extent necessary for communication of essential data.
2. Where drawings or diagrams are required, use draftsmen capable of preparing
drawings clearly in an understandable format.
B. For the instruction of the Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel, use
experienced instructors thoroughly trained and experienced in the operation and
maintenance of the building equipment or system involved.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule for submittal of operating and maintenance manuals:
1. Before substantial completion, when each installation that requires submittal
of operating and maintenance manuals is nominally complete, submit two draft
copies of each manual to the Architect for review. Include a complete index or
table of contents of each manual.
a. The Architect will return one (1) copy of the draft with comments
within fifteen (15) working days of receipt.
2. Submit one (1) copy of data in final form at least fifteen (15) days before final
inspection. This copy will be returned within fifteen (15) working days after final
inspection, with comments.
3. After final inspection, make corrections or modifications to comply with the
Architect’s comments. Submit the specified number of copies of each approved
manual to the Architect within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the Architect’s
comments.
B. Prepare operating and maintenance manuals, of manageable size, in the form of an
instructional manual for use by the Owner’s operating personnel.
1. Binders: For each manual, provide heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-
ring vinyl- covered loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate
contents, sized to receive A4 size paper. Provide a clear plastic sleeve on the
spine, to hold labels describing the contents. Provide pockets in the covers to
receive folded sheets.
a. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed
title “OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL”, Project Title or name, and
subject matter covered. Indicate the volume number for multiple volume
sets of manuals.
2. If drawings are part of the manual provide reinforced punched binder tabs on
the drawings and bind them in with the text.
a. Where oversize drawings are necessary, fold the drawings to the same
size as the text pages and use them as a fold-out.

P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 01 78 23
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

b. If drawings are too large to be used practically as a fold-out, place the

drawing, neatly folded, in the front or rear pocket of the binder. Insert a
typewritten page indicating the drawing title, description of contents and
drawing location at the appropriate location in the manual.

1.5 MANUAL CONTENT

A. In each manual include information specified in the individual Specifications Sections,
and the following information for each major component of building equipment and its
controls:
1. General system or equipment description.
2. Design factors and assumptions.
3. Copies of applicable shop drawings and product data.
4. System or equipment identification, including:
a. Name of manufacturer.
b. Model number.
c. Serial number of each component.
i. Operating instructions.
ii. Emergency instructions.
iii. Wiring diagrams.
iv. Inspection and test procedures.
v. Maintenance procedures and schedules.
vi. Precautions against improper use and maintenance.
vii. Copies of warranties.
viii. Repair instructions including spare parts listing.
ix. Sources of required maintenance materials and related
services.
x. Manual index.
B. Warranties, Bonds and Service Contracts: Provide a copy of each warranty for the
information of the Owner’s operating personnel. Provide written data outlining
procedures to be followed in the event of product failure. List the circumstances and
conditions that would affect the validity of the warranty or bond.

1.6 MATERIAL & FINISHES MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Provide complete manufacturer’s data and instructions on care and maintenance of
architectural products, including applied materials and finishes, including the following:
1. Manufacturer’s catalog number.
2. Size.
3. Material Composition.
4. Color.
5. Texture.
6. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 01 78 23
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Moisture Protection and Weather-Exposed Products: Provide complete manufacturer’s

data with instructions on inspection, maintenance and repair of products exposed to the
weather or designed for moisture-protection purposes.
1. Complete manufacturer’s data including the following, as applicable:
a. Applicable standards.
b. Chemical Composition.
c. Installation Details.
d. Inspection Procedures.
e. Maintenance Information.
f. Repair Procedures.

1.7 EQUIPMENT & SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Provide the following complete description for each piece of equipment and related
component parts:
1. Equipment or system function.
2. Operating characteristics.
3. Limiting conditions.
4. Performance curves.
5. Engineering data and tests.
6. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
B. For each manufacturer of a component part or piece of equipment provide the
following:
1. Printed operating and maintenance instructions.
2. Assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.
3. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
C. Provide information detailing essential maintenance procedures, including the
following:
1. Routine operations.
2. Trouble-shooting guide.
3. Disassembly, repair and re-assembly.
4. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
D. Provide information on equipment and system operating procedures, including the
following:
1. Start-up procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Shut-down and emergency instructions.
7. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
8. Special operating instructions.

P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 01 78 23
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

E. Servicing Schedule: Provide a schedule of routine servicing and lubrication

requirements, including a list of required lubricants for equipment with moving parts.
F. Controls: Provide a description of the sequence of operation and as installed control
diagrams by the control manufacturer for systems requiring controls.
G. Provide each Contractor with coordination drawings. Provide as installed color-coded
piping diagrams, where required for identification.
H. Valve Tags: Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each
valve.
I. Circuit Directories: For electric and electronic systems, provide complete circuit
directories of panel boards, including the following:
1. Electric Service.
2. Controls.
3. Communication.

1.8 INSTRUCTIONS OF THE OWNER’S PERSONNEL

A. Prior to final inspection, instruct the Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment, and
maintenance of products, equipment and systems. Provide instruction at mutually
agreed upon times.
1. Use operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment or
system as the basis of instruction. Review contents in detail to explain all aspects
of operation and maintenance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

-END OF SECTION 01 78 23-

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 03 15 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 03 15 13
Waterstops
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specifications Section shall apply to work of this section.
B. The following applications of waterstop are specified in this section.
1. As sealer in construction joints. For the water tanks.
C. Hydrophilic expandable rubber section for impermeable movement joints.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide products produced by a single manufacturer, with not less than 5 years of
successful production and use experience.
B. Installer: A firm licensed by or otherwise approved by materials manufacturer, for
installation of waterproofing in form, type and extent indicated for this project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product specifications, installation instructions and recommendations from
waterstop manufacturers, for each material and type of application required.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Maintain dry-type waterstop products in dry condition during delivery, storage,
handling, installation and concealment by other work shown to be placed over
waterproofing work. Remove and replace products that have been prematurely exposed
to moisture, comply with manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Products
1. As approved by the authorized person on the site.
B. Material:
1. Hydrophilic expandable rubber is a soft preformed flexible strip, with an
acrylic polymer base specially designed to provide the building sector with
impermeable movement joints up to hydraulic pressure of 5atm.
2. It does not contain bentonite due to its chemical composition, and gradually
expands when in permanent contact with water, creating an active barrier
against pressurized water (positive and negative).

P a g e | 1 of 2
 Section 03 15 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3. It can be applied in concrete, metal, PVC and natural stones.

4. It can be fixed mechanically with screws or nails spaced along the strip no
more than 25cm apart, to ensure perfect contact with the substrate.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s specifications, printed instructions,
recommendations and specific project application instructions. Construction Joints:
Where construction joints are indicated to be protected by flexible waterstop strips
either place concrete directly over flexible strips or press strips into preformed cavities.
Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for use of preformed flexible waterstop
strips where joint waterproofing is not otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Where construction joints are indicated to be protected by flexible
waterstop strips either place concrete directly over flexible strips or press strips into
preformed cavities. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for use of
preformed flexible waterstop strips where joint waterproofing is not otherwise
indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

A. Cut with a knife to the desired length.
B. Apply gasket adhesive evenly on the rubber strip or directly to the substrate.
C. Firm the gasket into the adhesive bed.
D. Alternative: Secure mechanically with nails or pins every 25 cm.
E. In line joint: Butt jointing of the two pieces of waterstop.
F. In line joint: The two ends are staggered with a 2-3 cm overlap for a better seal.
G. Horizontal corner joint H. Corner joint between floor and wall
I. For application on vertical surfaces it is recommended to install the gasket in length of
about 1 m.
J. Pieces longer than 1 cm can be installed on vertical surfaces by fixing the top of the
piece with a nail or pin and then extruding the waterstop adhesive directly onto the
underlying substrate.

-END OF SECTION 03 15 13-

P a g e | 2 of 2
 Section 03 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 03 30 13
Cast-in-Place Concrete
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents:
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Subcontract apply to this Section.
2. Review these documents for coordination with additional requirements and
information that apply to work under this Section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Cast-in-place Concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. General:
1. The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent stated.
The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent stated.
Where differences exist between codes and standards, the one affording the
greatest protection shall apply.
2. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one at
the time of commencement of Work.
3. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Requirements” for the list of applicable
regulatory requirements.
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. ACI 211.1 Proportioning Concrete Mixtures.
2. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete.
3. ACI 303.1 Specification for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete.
4. ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting.
5. ACI 308 Specifications for Curing Concrete.
6. ACI 309 Consolidation of Concrete.
7. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
C. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM):
1. ASTM C31 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field.
2. ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3. ASTM C94 Specification for Ready Mix Concrete.
4. ASTM C143 Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Concrete.
5. ASTM C150 Specification of Portland Cement.
6. ASTM C156 Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Liquid Membrane
Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete.
7. ASTM C171 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

P a g e | 1 of 8
 Section 03 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

8. ASTM C172 Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.

9. ASTM C260 Specifications for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
10. ASTM C309 Specification for Liquid Membrane – Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete.
11. ASTM C330 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete.
12. ASTM C494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
13. ASTM C567 Test Method for Determining Density of Structural Lightweight
Concrete. 14. ASTM C618 Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
15. ASTM C 881 Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete.
16. ASTM E 1745 Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
D. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridge.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provision of Division 01 Section “General Requirements.”
B. Product Data: Provide data for proprietary materials, including admixtures, curing
materials, and finish materials.
C. Submit Placement Shop Drawings, showing location of construction joints. Clearly
indicate the construction joints in different locations that those shown in the Drawings.
D. Samples: As requested by the Testing Laboratory.
E. Mix design for each concrete mix sealed by an engineer registered in the Philippines.
1. Include compression test data used to establish mix proportions.
F. Submit certification that the facilities of the ready-mix plant comply with the
requirements of ASTM C94.
G. Material Certificates:
1. Cementitious materials, including supplemental cementitious material.
2. Aggregates, including gradation and combined gradation.
3. Admixtures. Where more than one admixture is proposed, include a
statement from the admixture manufacturer indicating that admixtures
proposed for use are compatible, such that desirable effects of each admixture
will be realized.
H. Submit a ticket to the Testing Laboratory for each batch of concrete delivered, bearing
the following information. Refer to the “Field Quality Control” Article of this Section.
1. Mix identification.
2. Weights of cementitious materials, aggregates, water and admixtures, and
aggregate size.
I. Submit test reports from the independent testing agency for review by the Engineer.

P a g e | 2 of 8
 Section 03 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Quality assurance and inspection shall be in accordance with Division 01 Section “Special
Provisions”.
B. Standards: Comply with provisions of ACI 301, except where more stringent
requirements are indicated. Evaluation and acceptance of concrete structures will be in
accordance with ACI 301.
C. Concrete Mix Design: Testing Laboratory shall, under direction of the authorized person
on the site, design concrete mixes. Each mix shall bear the signature, seal and
registration expiration date of the engineer directing the design work. For mixes
containing greater than 25 percent fly ash, the Testing Laboratory shall produce
calculations and test batches in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 211.1 to
determine the minimum water content and to confirm workability, curing time and
compressive strength.
D. Certificates of Compliance: Acceptability of the following materials will be based upon
documentation furnished by the manufacturer identifying each batch of material and
certifying compliance with the requirements specified:
1. Portland Cement.
2. Fly ash.
3. Chemical admixtures.
E. Certified Laboratory Test Reports: Before the delivery of materials, submit certified
copies of the reports of the tests required in referenced standards or otherwise
specified here. The testing shall have been performed by an independent laboratory
approved by the Owner within one year of submittal of test reports for approval. Test
reports on a previously tested material shall be accompanied by notarized certificates
from the manufacturer certifying that the previously tested material is of the same type,
quality, manufacture and make as that proposed for use in the Project. Certified test
reports are required for the following:
1. Portland Cement.
2. Aggregates.
3. Admixtures.
F. Survey anchor bolts for placement and alignment prior to casting concrete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious materials and aggregates for exposed concrete shall be from the same
source throughout the work.
B. Supplemental Cementitious Materials:
1. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F with the following modified ASTM requirements:
a. Loss of Ignition (L.O.I.): maximum 1 percent.
b. Sulfur Trioxide (SO3) shall not exceed 3 percent by weight.
c. Water requirement maximum: 100 percent control.
P a g e | 3 of 8
 Section 03 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

C. Aggregate for Lightweight Concrete: ASTM C 330. Lightweight aggregate shall be

vacuum saturated expanded shale or clay produced by rotary kiln.
D. Water: Mixing water shall be clean, potable and free from deleterious material.
E. Admixtures
1. General:
a. Admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not
permitted.
b. Where mix contains more than one admixture, all admixtures shall be
supplied by one manufacturer. Manufacturer shall certify that admixtures
are compatible such that desirable effects of each admixture will be
realized.
c. Liquid admixtures shall be considered part of the total water.
F. Lightweight Concrete shall contain an air entrainment admixture conforming to ASTM
C260, to produce an air content of 3 to 5 percent at point of placement.
G. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. Provide in all concrete at necessary
dosage to facilitate placement.
1. Mid to High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type F;
polycarboxylate formulation. Provide in mid-range or high-range dosage as
necessary for placement at the maximum water to cement ratio specified.
2. Set Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E, non-chloride. Subject to
approval of the University's Representative, provide the necessary dosage to
accelerate the set.
3. Set Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D. Subject to approval of
University’s Representative, provide in necessary dosage to retard set.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Curing Compounds: ASTM C309, Type I, clear or translucent without dye, and which will
not discolor concrete or affect the bonding of other finishes applied there over, and
which restricts the loss of water to not more than 0.500 grams per square centimeter of
the surface when tested per ASTM C156, “Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete
Curing Materials.”
B. Slab Curing Membrane: Membrane conforming to ASTM C171, non-staining.
C. Burlap Sheet: AASHTO M 182, class 3 or 4.
D. Vapor Barrier: ASTM D2103, “Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.”
E. Sand Cover. Uniformly graded, clean sand free from excessive fines, organic
materials or other deleterious substances.

P a g e | 4 of 8
 Section 03 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.3 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Schedule of Concrete Classes:
Mix ID/ Use Aggregate Slump Minimum
Site Strength
Mix A Drilled Piers, Foundations Size 57 (25 100 to 150 4000 psi (27.6
mm) mm MPa)
Mix B Walls, Columns, Suspended
Slabs & Beams Size 57 (25 100 to 150 4000 psi (27.6
mm) mm MPa)
Mix C Floor Slabs on Grade,
Miscellaneous Concrete Size 57 (25 75 to 125 4000 psi (27.6
mm) mm MPa)
Mix D Lightweight Concrete Fill on
Metal Decking 13 mm 75 to 125 4000 psi (27.6
mm MPa)
Mix E Miscellaneous concrete for
curbs, pads, etc. 25 mm 75 to 125 3500 psi (24.1
mm MPa)
Lean Concrete 25mm 75 to 125 1500 psi (10.2
mm MPa)

B. Aggregate: Coarse aggregate size number per ASTM C33 for normal-weight aggregate.
Coarse aggregate size under ASTM C330 for lightweight aggregates.
C. Slump: Minimum-maximum slump at point of placement in inches when tested in
accordance with ASTM C143.
D. Strength: Minimum compressive strength in psi after 7 days, tested in accordance with
ASTM C39.
E. Other Requirements (apply only where indicated in Schedule of Concrete Mixes)
1. Shrinkage Controlled Concrete: Use special coarse aggregates specified. Select
materials and proportion mix to achieve shrinkage less than 0.040 percent
(ASTM C157 modified).
2. Water to Cementitious Material Ratio: Mixes “B”, “C” and “D” shall have a
water-to-cementitious-material ratio not exceeding 0.45 by weight. Weight of
water shall include all free moisture, including liquid admixture at mid-range
dosage as required to achieve specified slump.
3. Lightweight Concrete: Equilibrium weight (at 100 days air dry) of 113 pcf plus
or minus 3 pcf, ASTM C567. Mix shall contain 4 percent, plus or minus 1 percent,
entrained air by volume at point of placement.
F. Proposed mixes shall produce concrete to strengths specified with adequate workability
and proper consistency to permit concrete to be worked into forms and around
reinforcement without excessive segregation or bleeding.
G. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior.
P a g e | 5 of 8
 Section 03 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Division 01 Section “General Provisions”.
B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
C. Verify anchor bolts, embedded plates, reinforcement, sleeves and other items to be cast
into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in
placing concrete.

3.2 FORMWORK ERECTION

A. Verify lines, levels, and measurement before proceeding with formwork.
B. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms; remove loose dirt.
C. Align form joints.
D. Do not apply form release agent to concrete surfaces which receive special finishes or
applied coatings that may be affected by the agent.
1. Coordinate work of other sections in forming and setting openings, slots,
recesses, chases, sleeves, blots, anchors, and other inserts.

3.3 REINFORCEMENTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place, support, and secure reinforcement and embedded items against displacement.
B. Only items that are dimensionally located on the drawings may be embedded in
concrete regardless of the trade responsible for placing them.

3.4 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying a bonding
agent in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.
B. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying a bonding
agent in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.
C. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing
concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
D. Foundation surfaces against which concrete is to be placed must be free from standing
water, mud and debris. Surfaces shall be clean and free from oil, objectionable coatings,
and loose or unsound material.
E. All surfaces of forms and embedded items shall be free of grout before placing
concrete.
F. Install joint fillers and waterstops in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Install
½-inch (13mm) thick joint filler to separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces. Extend
joint filler from bottom of slab to within ¼-inch (6mm) of finished slab surface.
G. Locate construction joints where indicated on the Structural Drawings.
H. When ambient temperature is expected to exceed 80 degrees F during placing or
finishing operations, steps shall be taken in accordance with ACI 305, “Recommended
Practices for Hot Weather Concreting”, to reduce concrete temperature and water

P a g e | 6 of 8
 Section 03 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

evaporation by proper attention to the ingredients, production methods, handling,

placing, protection and curing. The subcontractor shall submit a detailed hot weather
concreting procedure to the A/E for approval at least two business days before concrete
placement is planned. The Subcontractor’s testing agency will produce trial batches in
accordance with ACI 305. Slabs will be fog sprayed from the completion of screeding
until curing is begun; the fog spray may be discontinued on sections during troweling.

3.5 FLOOR SLABS

A. Place floor slabs as indicated on Drawings. Saw cut control joints at an optimum time
after finishing. Cut slabs with a 3/16-inch (8mm) thick blade to 1 inch (25mm) depth
B. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. Extend joint filler from
bottom of slab to within ¼ inch of finished slab surface.
C. Scratch finish surfaces.
D. Install joint devices and joint device anchors in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions. Maintain the correct position to allow joint cover flush with floor finish.

3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. The requirements of this section may be modified only by the Structural Engineer of
Record (SER) for the design.
B. Wheeling, working and walking on concrete shall be avoided for at least 24 hours after
casting. Protect concrete from sun and rain. Do not permit concrete to become dry
during the curing period. Concrete shall not be subjected to any loads until concrete is
completely cured, and until concrete has attained its 28 day strength.
C. Protect concrete during and after curing from damage during subsequent building
construction operations.
D. Cover traffic areas with plywood or other suitable means for as long as necessary to
protect concrete from damage.
E. Specific curing requirements for slabs shall include the following: Immediately upon
completion of finishing operation, the surface of slabs shall be sealed against moisture
loss by the application of a curing blanket made of polyethylene bonded to burlap in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Alternatively, waterproof curing paper
may be used with edges lapped and sealed with tape. The curing membrane shall be
weighted down. Tears and rips in the curing membrane shall be repaired immediately
during the curing period. Curing shall be maintained for 7/14/21days.
F. Specific curing requirements for walls, beams and columns shall include the following:
Concrete in forms shall be kept moist until removal. Immediately upon removal of
forms, an approved sprayed-on curing compound shall be applied to the concrete
surfaces in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Curing shall be
maintained for 7 days.

P a g e | 7 of 8
 Section 03 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection and Testing will be performed under provisions of Division 01.
B. Testing Laboratory will:
1. Collect and review tickets for each batch of concrete delivered. Annotate
water or admixtures added subsequent to batching.
2. Slump: ASTM C143; one test at point of placement at start of each day’s pour,
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to have changed.
3. Temperature: ASTM C1064; one test hourly. Take additional tests where
warranted by weather conditions or delays in delivery.
4. Air Content: ASTM C173; for mixes with more than 3 percent air, take one test
hourly at point of placement.

- END OF SECTION 03 30 00 –

P a g e | 8 of 8
 Section 03 32 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 03 32 00
Concrete Topping
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specifications Section shall apply to work of this section.
B. Division 3 Sections for related concrete specifications; Division 7 Sections for
waterproofing requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Types of concrete floor toppings include:
1. Standard aggregate reinforced concrete toppings (3000 psi) for use as
protection course over waterproofing.
2. Concrete toppings for floor with waterproofing requirements and other areas
where required.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Comply with requirements of Section “Concrete Work” (Prepared by the Structural
Engineer) and as herein specified.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish data, samples, laboratory test reports, and materials certificates as specified in
Section “Concrete Work” (Prepared by the Structural Engineer).

1.5 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-up installations for concrete topping with special aggregates and finishes.
B. Minimum area for each type shall be 1.20m x 1.20m (1.44 m2.), unless otherwise
required by the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CEMENT & AGGREGATES

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150: “Standard Specifications for Portland Cement”, Type I. 1.
Furnish grey cement.
B. Standard Aggregate: ASTM C 33: “Specification for Concrete Aggregates”, and as
follows:
1. Fine aggregate, consisting of sand or crushed stone screenings, clean, hard,
free from deleterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:
a. 9.53mm (3/8”) - 100 percent.
b. No. 4 - 95-100 percent.
P a g e | 1 of 3
 Section 03 32 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

c. No. 8 - 80-90 percent.

d. No. 16 - 50-75 percent.
e. No. 30 - 30-50 percent.
f. No. 50 - 10-20 percent.
g. No. 100 - 2-5 percent.
2. Coarse aggregate consisting of gravel or crushed stone, clean, heard, free from
deleterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:
a. 12.7mm (1/2”) - 100 percent.
b. 9.525mm (3/8”) - 30-50 percent.
c. No. 4 - 0-15 percent.
d. No. 8 - 0-5 percent.
C. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized welded wire fabric 100mm x 100mmW1.4/W1.4,
ASTM A 185:” Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement”, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Acceptable Products: Any other approved equal by the Architect/Engineer.

2.2 MIXING
A. Provide batch-type mechanical mixer for mixing topping material at the project site. Use
only mixers which are capable of mixing aggregates, cement, and water into a uniform
mix within specified time, and of discharging mix without segregation.
B. Mix each batch of 1.5 cubic meter (2 cu. yd.) or less for at least 1.5 minutes after
ingredients are in the mixer. Increase mixing time (15 seconds) for each additional cubic
meter or fraction thereof.
C. Strength of Concrete Topping:
1. Standard aggregate reinforced concrete toppings (3000 psi) for use as
protection course over waterproofing and leveling topping of floors and decks,
interior and exterior locations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES

A. Topping Applied to Hardened Concrete: Remove dirt, loose material, oil, grease, paint or
other contaminants, leaving a clean surface. When the base slab surface is unacceptable
for good bonding, roughen the surface by chipping or scarifying before cleaning.
B. Prior to placing the topping mixture, thoroughly dampen the slab surface but do not
leave standing water. Over a dampened surface, apply specified epoxy adhesive. Place
topping mix while epoxy adhesive is still tacky.
C. For reinforced toppings, provide necessary chairs or supports and maintain the position
of reinforcing mesh as shown on drawings.
D. Joints: Mark locations of joints in base slab so that joints in the top course will be placed
directly over them. Joints shall not be more than 3.0 m on-center, both ways.
P a g e | 2 of 3
 Section 03 32 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.2 PLACING & COMPACTING

A. Floating: Spread topping mixture evenly over the prepared base to the required
elevation and strike-off.
B. Where joints are required, construct to match and coincide with joints in the base slab.
Provide other joints as shown.

3.3 TROWEL FINISH

A. After floating, start with the first trowel finish operation using power-driven trowels and
continue until the surface is ready to receive final troweling.
B. Continue final trowel operation to produce finished surface free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance.
C. Apply hardener and sealer as per manufacturer’s recommendation for indicated areas.

3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Provide concrete topping with a tolerance of 3mm in 3m (1 in 1000). Follow procedure
in (American Concrete Institute) ACI 302 – Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab
Construction.

3.5 CURING & PROTECTION

A. Cure and protect topping application and finishes as specified in Section “Concrete
Work”.

3.6 PERFORMANCES
A. Failure of concrete topping to bond to substrate (as evidenced by a hollow sound when
tapped), or disintegration or other failure of topping to perform as a floor finish, will be
considered a failure of materials and workmanship. Repair or replace toppings in areas
of such failure, as directed by the authorized person on the site.

- END OF SECTION 03 32 00 –

P a g e | 3 of 3
 Section 03 35 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 03 35 00
Concrete Finishing
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions shall apply to
work of this section.
B. Section 03 32 00 - Concrete Topping.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of different concrete finishes is shown on drawings and in schedules.
B. Provide the following finishes as described herein:
1. Scratched.
2. Rubbed.
3. Straight to Finish.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples not less than 300 x 300mm size of each type of required concrete finish,
indicating methods used to produce finishes. Architect’s review will be for color and
texture only.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Allow concrete to cure not less than 72 hours before commencing surface finish
operations, unless otherwise acceptable to the authorized person on the site.
B. Protect adjacent materials and finishes from dust, dirt and other surface or physical
damage during finishing operations. Provide protection as required and remove it from
the site at completion of work.
C. Repair or replace other work damaged by finishing operations, as directed by the
authorized person on the site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Where materials, products, or equipment are specified by reference to a specific
standard or by reference to a specific manufacturer, materials, products, or equipment
that ensure an equal or higher quality than the standards or manufacturers mentioned
will also be acceptable. It will be incumbent on the Contractor to verify the equal or
higher quality and submit comparative data (both specified and proposed data) for
review.

P a g e | 1 of 8
 Section 03 35 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.2 CURING
A. All curing, hardening and sealing agents that are to be applied sequentially shall be the
products of a single manufacturer. All areas to receive sealant or caulking compounds
shall be masked before application of curing or sealing agent.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Non-shrink patching and surfacing shall not contain gypsum, ferrous metal, nonferrous
metal or corrosion promoting agents.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Related unformed surfaces are to be struck off, floated and/or troweled to produce
texture consistent with adjacent formed surfaces or as indicated on the drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove and replace defective concrete which is not properly formed, that is out of
alignment or level, or displays surface defects unless the authorized person permits
patching or other corrective measures. Permission to patch defective concrete is not a
waiver of an Architect's right to require complete removal of defective work if patching
does not work, in his opinion, satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the
surface.

3.3 RUBBED FINISH

A. Begin surface grinding after wearing course has hardened sufficiently to prevent
dislodgement of aggregate particles. Keep surfaces wet during the grinding process.
B. Fill air holes, pits, and other blemishes with cement grout. Spread grout over the surface
and work into openings with a steel straight edge. Rub grout into the surface by using a
grinding machine. Keep the surface moist an additional 3 days before final grinding.
C. When the surface is in proper condition, begin second or final grinding to remove grout
film and polish surface. After final grinding and polishing, wash thoroughly and remove
surplus material.
D. Conduct grinding operations and use such techniques as required to provide surface
finish to match Architect’s samples.

3.4 FLATWORK SURFACES-GENERAL

A. Preparation: Set bulkheads and screed strips to facilitate continuous concrete
placement and to produce cross-sections within tolerances specified in Section
“Concrete Formwork (by the Structural Consultant)”. For cambered steel or concrete
beams, place screed strips or other indicators along the beam centerline to maintain
constant slab thickness. Float, trowel, scratch, broom, cure, harden, seal and apply non-

P a g e | 2 of 8
 Section 03 35 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

slip particles and other surface treatments to the top of the structural slab or to the top
of concrete fills as shown on the Contract Documents.
B. Power Float and Hand Float after water sheen has disappeared to push down aggregate,
raise mortar, and level.
C. Power Trowel and Hand Trowel as soon as the surface can be worked without cement
paste clinging to the blades.
D. Where non-slip is called for with any finish, embed particles at the rate of 1 kilogram per
square meter with the final tooling.
E. Tolerances:
1. Class A: Level to within 3 millimeters in 3 meters (1/1000).
2. Class B: Level to within 6 millimeters in 3 meters (1/500).

3.5 SLAB FINISHES

A. Provide scratched finish for rigid, cementitious surfaces (concrete topping, ceramic and
all the works):
1. Consolidate and level to Class B tolerance.
2. Roughen surface and expose aggregate.
3. Moist cure only. Do not use chemical curing.

3.6 CLEAN-UP & PROTECTION

A. Maintain control of concrete chips, dust and debris in each area of work and remove
such material at completion every day.
B. Cooperate with other trades for protection of complete finishes.

- END OF SECTION 03 35 00 –

P a g e | 3 of 8
 Section 04 22 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 04 22 00
Concrete Unit Masonry
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, and Division 1 specifications sections, shall apply to work of this section.
B. Refer to the Structural Engineer’s “General Notes” and Specifications related to masonry
work.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all required reinforcements, stiffener posts, lintel beams, dowels, etc., for the
complete execution of reinforced unit masonry work.
1. Reinforcements shall be as per the indicated requirements of the
“Construction Notes” of the Structural Drawings.
2. Reinforced Unit Masonry work around chase slab openings shall have all cells
filled with concrete.
3. Reinforced Unit Masonry walls shall always be terminated with stiffener
columns whenever it will be free-standing or will not abut a column or reinforced
concrete wall.
4. Openings on reinforced unit masonry walls (doors, windows, etc.) shall be
provided with lintel beams above the openings and shall extend not less than
200mm on both sides.
5. Provide sealants, compressible fillers at masonry wall terminations on beams,
under-slabs, columns as per Structural Design requirement. Provide fire-rated
seals for fire-rated masonry walls. Refer to the following specifications sections:
a. Section 07 92 00-Joint Sealers for architectural sealants.
B. Contractor shall provide all required labor, materials, furnishings, plant and equipment
for the complete provision of the required Masonry work.

1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
A. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) PUBLICATIONS
1. A 615-82 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
2. C 9075 (R1981) Hollow Load – Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
3. C 952-76 Bond Strength of Mortar to Masonry Units.
4. C 33-83 Concrete Aggregates.
5. C 39-83 (Rev. B) Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
6. C 129-75 (R1981) Hollow Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.

P a g e | 1 of 9
 Section 04 22 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

7. C 140-75 (R1980) Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.

8. C 144-81 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
9. C 150-83 (Rev. B) Portland Cement.
10. C 207-79 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
11. C 270-82 Mortar for Unit Masonry.
12. C 404-76 (R1981) Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
13. C 426-70 (R1976) Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Block.
14. C 476-83 Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry.
B. FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FED. SPEC)
1. A-C-621b Concrete Masonry Unit, Hollow (GSA-FSS) & Int. AM-2.
C. AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI) PUBLICATIONS
1. 315-74 (1978) Manual of Standard Practice for detailing reinforced concrete
structures.
D. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) STANDARD
1. 618-79 Concrete Masonry Units.

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Continuous inspection: Employ a qualified masonry inspector approved by the Architect
and the Construction Manager in addition to the Contractor’s Quality Control
Representative to perform a continuous inspection of the masonry work. The masonry
inspector shall be at the site during all masonry construction and shall perform the
following duties:
1. Before masonry work commences, reviews plans and specifications and meets
with the Architect and Construction Manager and the Contractor’s Quality
control Representative to review the requirements for surveillance and quality
control of the masonry work.
2. Check brand and type of cement, lime (if used) and source of sand.
3. Ensures that the foundation is clean and ready to receive units.
4. Checks reinforcing steel dowels for straightness, proper alignment, spacing,
size, and length.
5. Observes field proportioning of mortar. Visually checks aggregate to
determine uniformity of grading, cleanliness and moisture.
6. Ensures that joints are full of mortar and kept tight during work.
7. Performs or supervises performance of required sampling and testing.
8. Keep a complete record of inspection. Monitor daily to the Contractor’s
Quality.
B. Sample panel: After material samples are approved prior to starting masonry work,
construct one sample panel of each type of masonry for approval by the authorized
person on the site. Do not build sample panels as part of the structure, but locate them
where directed. Provide panels not less than 1200 mm long x 1200 mm high. Construct
panels that show bond, pattern, mortar joints including tooling, anchors, joint
reinforcement, lintel beam reinforcement, wall ties, reinforcing bars, grouting, control
P a g e | 2 of 9
 Section 04 22 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

joints, expansion joints, and cleaning of masonry. If a sealer is specified to be applied to

masonry units, apply the sealer to the sample panel. Use the approved sample panels as
a standard of workmanship for the type of masonry represented. Protect sample panels
from the weather until work controlled by the sample panels has been completed and
approved. Construction of masonry will not be permitted until sample panels have been
approved. Remove sample panels after completion of work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. Anchors & Ties: Two of each type proposed for use.
2. Concrete Masonry Units - Five stretcher units for each type or size.
3. Joint Reinforcement - One piece of each type of reinforcement, including
corner and wall intersection pieces, showing at least two cross joints.
4. Aggregates - Take one sample of the source from each stockpile for each type
of aggregate specified herein. Collect each sample by taking three incremental
samples at random from the source material to make a composite sample of not
less than 4.54 kg (10 pounds).
B. Certified laboratory test reports: Reports of all tests listed below:
1. Concrete Masonry Units-Compressive strength, linear drying shrinkage, unit
weight, and absorption of each type of unit.
C. Shop Drawings
1. Reinforcing bars: Include plans, elevations, and details showing treatment of
reinforcing at turns and offsets, intersections of similar and dissimilar materials,
tops, bottoms and ends of walls; control and expansion joints; and wall
openings. Show details of positioning devices for vertical reinforcing bars.

1.6 PLANT QUALITY CONTROL

Prior to delivery of masonry units to site, select by random sampling consisting of 9
individual whole units from the units proposed for use. Select units free from cracks or
other structural defects. Test in accordance with ASTM C 140 and ASTM C 426.

1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

Handle, store, and protect masonry units to avoid chipping, breakage or contact
with the soil. Keep anchors, ties, steel reinforcing bars and joint reinforcement
free of rust and loose scale. Reject rusted steel reinforcing, anchors, ties and
joint reinforcement. Deliver cement in unbroken bags, barrels, or other sealed
containers. Keep cementitious materials dry. Store and handle cement to
prevent the inclusion of foreign materials. Store aggregates in a manner to avoid
contamination or segregation.

P a g e | 3 of 9
 Section 04 22 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS FOR MORTAR & GROUT

A. Source of Materials: Do not change the source of materials which will affect the
appearance of the finished work after the work has started without permission of the
Architect.
B. Aggregate for Mortar:
1. ASTM C 144.
2. Aggregate used in mortar for joints 6mm or less shall conform to Note 1 to
ASTM C 144.
C. Aggregate for Grout:
1. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 404.
2. Pea Gravel: ASTM C 404 except that 100 percent shall pass the 100 mm screen
and not more than 5 percent shall pass the No. 8 sieve.
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 404, size No. 8 or ASTM C 33, 20 mm maximum size
as specified in grading Table I herein for size of grout space.
D. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150.
E. Water: Potable and clean.
1. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
2. Pulverized quicklime: ASTM C 5 except 100 percent shall pass the No. 20 sieve
and 90 percent shall pass the No. 50 sieve.
3. Lime Paste: Lime paste shall be made with pulverized quicklime or hydrated
lime. Hydrated lime processed by the steam method shall be allowed to soak not
less than 24 hours. Quicklime and other hydrated lime shall be allowed to soak
not less than 72 hours. Instead of hydrated lime paste for use in mortar, the
hydrated lime may be added in the dry form.

2.2 MORTAR MIXES

A. Proportions: Comply with ASTM C 270 proportion specifications.
1. Provide 2500 psi mortar for 28 days.

2.3 GROUT MIXTURES

A. Proportions: Mix in laboratory established proportions to attain a compressive strength
at 28 days of not less than 2500 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C 91 for fine
aggregate. Grout shall be classified as fine, low lift and high lift types as specified below
and shall be used subject to the limitations of Table I herein.
1. Fine Grout: Portland Cement, fine aggregate, and sufficient water to obtain a
pouring consistency without segregation of the constituents. Slump shall be
approximately 125mm.
2. Low-Lift Grout: Portland Cement, lime paste or hydrated lime, fine aggregate
and lightweight coarse aggregate, and sufficient water to obtain a pouring
consistency without segregation of the constituents. Slump must be in between
P a g e | 4 of 9
 Section 04 22 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

200 and 250 mm. Maximum size of coarse aggregate for grout in accordance
with Table I herein.
3. High-Lift Grout: Portland Cement, grout admixture, fine aggregate and pea
gravel or lightweight consistency suitable for pumping without segregation of
the constituents. Slump shall be between 225 and 275mm. The maximum size of
the coarse aggregate is in accordance with Table I.
B. Batching and Mixing: Conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM C 94.

2.4 MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Masonry Units (where required)
1. Aggregates: ASTM C 33 or C 331 except grading of aggregates as stipulated in
ASTM C 33 and testing of lightweight aggregates for drying shrinkage as
stipulated in ASTM C 331 will not be required.
2. Linear drying shrinkage: Not to exceed 0.065 percent when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 426.
3. Kinds and Shapes: In addition to the requirements specified, concrete masonry
units of the various kinds shall conform to the specifications referenced below.
a. Hollow Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 129, Grade N, Type !, Normal
Weight, Non-load Bearing, 4481.57 kPa (650 psi) at 28 days. Refer to
Structural specifications for load-bearing hollow block requirements.

2.5 DEFORMED REINFORCING BARS

A. Verify Structural requirements: ASTM A 615, Grade 230 for 10mm diameter bars and
Grade 275 for 12mm diameter bars and bigger.

2.6 REINFORCED CONCRETE PANEL

A. Materials: (Verify Location)
1. 200 mm thick.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Concealed Masonry Surfaces
1. Surfaces covered by furring and wallboard, plaster, or masonry facings.
2. Surfaces above suspended ceilings.
B. Exposed Masonry Surfaces: Masonry surfaces other than listed above including those to
be painted.
C. Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry: Hollow concrete masonry units reinforced vertically
and horizontally with steel bars located within cells or kerfs in the units and with all cells
filled solidly with grout.

P a g e | 5 of 9
 Section 04 22 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

D. Grout Lift and Grout Pour: A grout lift is the layer of grout placed in a single continuous
operation. A grout pour is the entire height of grout fill placed in one day and is
composed of a number of successively placed grout lifts.

3.2 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SURFACES

A. Clean laitance, dust, dirt, oil, organic matter or other foreign materials from the
concrete surface upon which reinforced masonry is to be placed. Use sandblasting, if
necessary to remove laitance from pores and to expose the aggregate.

3.3 FORMS AND SHORES

A. Where required, construct forms to the shapes, lines, and dimensions of the members
indicated. Construct forms that are sufficiently rigid to prevent deflections that can
cause cracking or other damage to supported masonry as well as tight enough to
prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Do not remove supporting forms or shores until
the supported masonry has acquired sufficient strength to safely support its weight and
any construction loads to which it may be subjected. In no case shall forms or shores be
removed in less than 10 days. Wait at least 16 hours after grouting masonry columns or
walls before applying uniform loads and wait an additional 48 hours before applying
concentrated loads.

3.4 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL

Prior to placing grout, clean all reinforcement of loose, flaky, rusty, scale, grease,
mortar, or other coating which might destroy or reduce its bond with the mortar. Details
of reinforcement shall be as indicated. Do not bend or straighten reinforcing in a
manner injurious to the steel. Do not use bars with kinks or bends not shown on the
drawings. Placement of reinforcement shall be inspected and approved prior to placing
grout. Splice vertical bars only where indicated. Follow the requirements of the
structural specifications.
A. Positioning Bars: Position vertical bars accurately at the center line of the wall. Maintain
the minimum clearance between the bars and masonry units of 1/2-inch (12mm) and
between parallel bars of the diameter of the reinforcement. Hold vertical reinforcing in
place using metal supports, centering clips, spacers, ties or caging devices located near
the ends of each bar and at intermediate intervals of not more than 192 diameters of
the reinforcement. Wire column and pilaster ties in position around the vertical steel.
Laying ties in mortar joints will not be permitted.
B. Splices: Locate splices only as indicated. Stagger splices of adjacent bars at least 24
inches (600mm). Lap bars a minimum of 40 diameters of the reinforcement or 600mm,
whichever is greater. Welded or mechanical connections shall develop the full strength
of the reinforcement.
C. Vertical and Horizontal Reinforcement: Refer to the Structural plans.
D. Dowels: Refer to Structural plans.

P a g e | 6 of 9
 Section 04 22 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.5 SAMPLING AND TESTING

A. Mortar & Grout: Employ a qualified testing laboratory to proportion and test mortar and
grout. Do not change laboratory established proportions or use materials with different
physical or chemical characteristics in mortar and grout for the work unless additional
evidence is furnished that the mortar and grout meet the specified requirements.
B. Mortar & Grout Admixtures: When admixtures are proposed for use, submit test reports
before beginning construction indicating the advantages to result. The laboratory that
designed the mortar and grout mix shall perform the tests. Make six test specimens
from the mixture without admixture, as control specimens, and six test specimens from
the mixture containing admixture. The mixture used in this testing shall be identical
except for the admixture, and shall be designed and mixed from identically graded
aggregates and from the same brand and type of cement, in strict conformance to the
properties specified herein for mortar and grout. The mixture with and without the
admixture shall have the same aggregate ratio, water retention, and compressive
strength as stipulated. Admixture shall be used in conformance with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Test each of the mortars for bond strength in conformance with
ASTM C 952 and for water retention and compressive strength in conformance with
ASTM C 270. Test each of the grouts for compressive strength.
1. Preparation of Samples: On a flat non-absorbent base, form a space
approximately 75 mm x 75 mm x 150 mm high (3 in. x by 3 in. x 6 in.) i. e. twice
as high as it is wide, using masonry units have the same moisture conditions as
those being laid. Line the space with permeable paper or porous separator so
that water may pass through the linear into the masonry units. Thoroughly mix
or agitate grout to obtain a fully representative mix. Place into molds in two
layers; puddle each layer with a long 25mm x 50mm (1 in. x 2 in.) puddling stick
to eliminate air bubbles. Level off and immediately cover molds and keep them
damp until taken to the laboratory. After 48-hours set, have the laboratory
carefully remove masonry units and place them in the fog room until tested in
the damp condition. Sample shall be tested in accordance with the applicable
portion of ASTM C 39.
C. Tests for Strength of Mortar & Grout
1. Mortar
a. Sampling: Take specimens of mortar as directed. Spread a layer of
mortar 12.7mm (1/2-inch) to 15.87mm (5/8-inch) thick on the masonry units and
allow to stand for one minute. Remove the mortar and place it in a 50.8mm (2-
inch) diameter by 101.6mm (4 in.) high cylinder in two layers, compressing the
mortar the cylinder using a flat and stick or fingers. Lightly tap the mold on
opposite sides, level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until
taken to the laboratory. After 48 hours, remove molds and place specimens in a
fog room until tested in damp condition.

P a g e | 7 of 9
 Section 04 22 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

b. Test: Test samples in accordance with the applicable portions of ASTM

C 39. Samples shall exhibit a minimum ultimate compressive strength of
10342.08 kPa (1,500 psi).
2. Grout
a. Sampling: Take at least 5 specimens of grout each day. On a flat
nonabsorbent base, form a space approximately 75mm x 75mm x 150mm
high (3” x by 3” x 6” ) using masonry units that have the same moisture
condition as those being laid. Line the space with a permeable paper or
porous separator so that water may pass through the liner into the
masonry units. Thoroughly mix or agitate grout to obtain a fully
representative mix and place into molds in two layers. Puddle each layer
bubbles. Level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp
until taken to the laboratory. After 48 hours, remove molds and place
specimens in a fog room until tested in the damp condition.
b. Test: Test samples in accordance with the applicable portions of ASTM
C 39. Samples shall exhibit a minimum ultimate compressive strength of
2000 pounds per square inch.
D. Efflorescence Tests: Perform efflorescence test on mortar materials which will be
exposed to weathering. Tests shall be scheduled far enough in advance before starting
masonry work to permit re-testing if necessary.
1. Mortar: Prepare 85.05 g (3 ounces) mortar specimens of each proposed mix,
using as little water as possible. While the specimen is still in plastic condition
and prior to the ties initial set, place it in a glass or glazed receptacle, and mix
113.4g (4 ounces) of distilled water with the mortar and stir thoroughly for 5
minutes. Use a receptacle of such a size that when the mortar specimen and
water are combined in solution, and a masonry unit is placed in it, the solution
will have a depth of 12.7mm (½ in.) 25.4mm (1inch). Place a masonry unit in the
solution indoors at normal temperature for 7 days. Remove the masonry unit
from the solution and air dry for 24 hours. Compare the masonry unit with an
untreated unit, and if the difference due to efflorescence is noticeable when
viewed at a distance of 10 feet (3.0 m), the mortar components shall be tested in
separate receptacles, each containing a masonry unit that has been tested and
found free of efflorescence. Thoroughly mix each mortar component with 113.4g
(4 ounces) of distilled water, using 1 ounce of level at a depth of 12.7mm (½ in.)
to 25mm (1 in.) with distilled water. Leave the masonry unit in the solution
indoors at normal temperature for 7 days. Remove the masonry units from the
solution and observe for efflorescence, as specified herein. Reject the
component causing efflorescence.

P a g e | 8 of 9
 Section 04 22 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

TABLE I
POUR HEIGHT AND TYPE OF GROUT FOR VARIOUS GROUT SPACE DIMENSIONS
GROUT SPACE GROUT MAXIMUM
Maximum Horizontal Type Coarse Height of
Dimension Of (See Paragraph Aggregates Grout Pour
Core Inches entitled Grout) (Inches)
24
2 x 4 (50mm x 100mm) Low Lift ASTM C 404, Size 8
(600mm)
3/8 inch (10mm) 72*
3 x 4 (75mm x 100mm) Low Lift
pea gravel (1800mm)
3 1/2 x 4 3/8 inch (10mm) 288*
High Lift
(87.5mm x 100mm) pea gravel (7200mm)
ASTM C 33,
288*
5 x 6 (125mm x 150mm) High Lift 3/4 inch
(7200mm)
(19mm) max.

 Where only cells of hollow masonry units containing reinforcement are grouted,
the maximum height of the pour shall not exceed the distance between bond
beams.

- END OF SECTION 04 22 00 –

P a g e | 9 of 9
 Section 05 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 05 50 00
Metal Fabrication
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specifications Section shall apply to work of this Section.
B. Section 09 91 00-Painting.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following metal fabrications (Verify Design and Location):
1. Trench Drain
2. Stair Railing
2.1. Handrail : 50mm x 25mm x 3mm thick
Steel Tubular Handrail Hot Dipped,
Painted Finish
2.2. Horizontal : 32mm x 6mm thick Flat Bar,
Hot Dipped (Painted)
2.3. Vertical : 12mm Square Bar, Hot Dipped (Painted)
: 38 mm x 9 mm thick
Flat Bar Vertical Support,
Hot Dipped (Painted)
3. Ramp Railing
3.1. Handrail : 50mm x 25mm x 3mm thick
Steel Tubular Handrail Painted Finish
3.2. Vertical : 12mm Square Bar
Vertical Railing (Painted)

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASTM E 985:"Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails
for Buildings,” for railing-related terms apply to this section.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Fabricate and install the following metal fabrications to
withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design
working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each
load to produce the maximum stress in each respective component of each metal
fabrication.
1. Concentrated load of 136 kg (300 lbf.) applied at any point at the top of the
rail vertically downward, or horizontally.

P a g e | 1 of 10
 Section 05 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Uniform load of 45.36 kg (100 lbf) per linear ft. applied non-concurrently,
vertically downward or horizontally.
3. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act
concurrently.
4. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following
loads applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 27.66 m-kg (200 lb-f) applied at any point non-
concurrently, vertically downward or horizontally.
b. Uniform load of 6.915 m-kg (50 lb-f per linear feet) per one third of a
linear meter applied non-concurrently, vertically downward or
horizontally.
c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act
concurrently.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete technical product data for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications,
including paint products and grout.
B. Complete shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication
indicated. That includes plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and
their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors
and bolts specified for installation under other sections.
1. Where installed metal fabrications are indicated to comply with certain design
loading, including structural computations, material properties, and other
formation needed for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer who is responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by the
authorized person on the site.
D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with
requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" article.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information
specified.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator firms shall have experience in successfully producing metal fabrications
similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce
required units without causing a delay in the work.
B. Installation of metal fabrications specified in this section shall be by the same firm that
fabricated them.

P a g e | 2 of 10
 Section 05 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

C. Quality welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1
"Structural Welding Code-Steel" D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel", and D1.2
"Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualifications tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone certification.
D. Engineer shall be licensed to practice in the jurisdiction where the project is located. He
shall have experience in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have
resulted in the successful installation of metal fabrications similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must
fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements
on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delay of work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the work, provide materials
selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do
not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
rolled trade names, roughness, and for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding
those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36:”Specification for Structural Steel”.
C. Rolled Steel floor Plates: ASTM A 786.
D. Steel Tubing: Product Type (manufacturing method) and as follows:
E. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade A.
F. Uncoated Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, product type (method of manufacture) as
follows:
1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366.
G. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Structural Quality shall comply with ASTM A 446; Grade A,
unless another grade is required for design loading, and G90 coating designation unless
otherwise indicated.
H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type and weight class as follows:
1. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
2. Type F, schedule 40.
I. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and
finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type, galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable
iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as
required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. Where required.
P a g e | 3 of 10
 Section 05 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

K. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for the
metal alloy to be welded.
L. Wrought Iron: Shall conform to ASTM designation A-41.
M. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.

2.2 STAINLESS STEEL

A. Bar Stock: ASTM A 276, Type 304/316.
B. Sheets and Plates: ASTM A 167, Type 304/316.
C. Pipe: ASTM A 312, Grade TP 316, schedule 40.
D. Castings: ASTM A 743, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.
E. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grades MT 304/316, Schedule 40.

2.3 BRASS
A. Extruded shapes : ASTM B455.
B. Plates and Sheets : ASTM B 36.

2.4 ALUMINUM
A. Aluminum: Provide forms and types shown and specified for each item of work and
comply with the following general standards. Provide alloy and temper recommended
by aluminum producer or finisher for the type of use and finish indicated and with not
less than the strength and durability properties of the alloy and temper designated
below for each aluminum form required.
1. Extruded Bar and Shapes: ASTM B 221, 6063-T6.
2. Extruded Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429, 6063-T6.
3. Drawn Seamless Tube: ASTM B 483, 6063-T832.
4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, 6061-T6.
5. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, 6061-T6.
6. Castings: ASTM B 26, 356.0-T6.
7. Minimum Thicknesses:
a. Plates: 6 mm.
b. Extrusions: 3 mm.

2.5 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Non-shrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C621. Provide grout specifically
recommended by the manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type
specified in this section.
B. Erosion Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory pre-packed, non-shrink, non-staining,
hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at project site
to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation
that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without the need for protection by a
sealer or waterproof coating and is recommended for exterior use by manufacturer.

P a g e | 4 of 10
 Section 05 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

C. Products:
1. Non-shrink Nonmetallic Grouts.
2. Erosion Resistant Anchoring Cement.

2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls.
Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A. Where required.
C. Lag Bolts: Square head type. Where required.
D. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel. Where required.
E. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel. Where required.
F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel. Where required.
G. Drilled in Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors non-drilling, internally threaded tubular
expansion anchor and machine bolts. Where required.
H. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type. Where required.
I. Lock Washers.

2.7 PAINT
A. Provide one (1) coat of epoxy primer equivalent to 37.5 microns and two (2) coats of full
gloss enamel paint with total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in
galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust weight, and
complying with SSPC-Paint-20.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 except
containing no asbestos fibers.

2.8 CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Division-3 Section
"Concrete Work" for normal weight, concrete with minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 20,684.16 kPa (3,000 psi.) and which ratio of 0.65 maximum, unless higher
strengths indicated.
B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615:” Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-
Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement”, Grade 60 unless otherwise indicated.

2.9 FABRICATION GENERAL

A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not
less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to
dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication
and support. Use the type of materials indicated or specified for various components of
each metal fabrication.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
sharp edges.

P a g e | 5 of 10
 Section 05 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

C. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

D. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 0.794 mm (1/32 inch), unless
otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without
causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
E. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded
surface matches those adjacent.
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth using concealed
fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or if not indicated,
Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
H. Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate
and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.
I. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible to
minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping
and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined
pieces. Clearly mark units for re-assembly and coordinated installation.
J. Cut, reinforce drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finished
hardware, screws, and similar items.
K. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or
provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.10 ROUGH HARDWARE

A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels,
and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting
woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.
Straight bolts and other stork rough hardware items are specified in Division 6 sections.
B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-iron
washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections. Elsewhere
furnish steel washers.

2.11 LADDER RUNGS

A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacing, details
and anchorages as indicated on drawings.
B. Provide 16 mm. diameter stainless steel ladder rungs inside concrete water storage
tanks.
P a g e | 6 of 10
 Section 05 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.12 RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS

A. General: Fabricate pipe railings and handrails to comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of pipe,
post spacing, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.
B. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt- welding or welding with internal
connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated.
1. At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of intersecting members fit the
contour of pipe to which end is joined and weld all around.
C. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending.
D. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature
for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of pipe.
E. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 4.7625 mm (3/16 inch) thick steel plate in place
or by use of prefabricated fittings, except where clearance of end of pipe and adjoining
wall surface is 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) or less.
F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, for attachment of railings
and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting
railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work.
1. Wall Brackets: Fabricated from solid steel round bars, galvanized, of size as
indicated.
G. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or required to
support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads
through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thickness. Size
the fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and over stressing of
substrate.
H. Finish: Provide gloss enamel paint over epoxy primer. Refer to Section 09 91 00.
I. Verify Design and Location.

2.13 NOSINGS
A. 50 mm. x 50 mm. x 6 mm. thick Angular Bar support at Stair Nosing.

2.14 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMINGS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or which is not a part of
structural steel framework, as required to complete work.
B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent
other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel
shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field
connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building
into masonry. Furnish inserts, if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
P a g e | 7 of 10
 Section 05 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 609.6 mm (24 inches) o.c. and
provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 31.75 mm x 6.35 mm x
203.2 mm (1-¼ in. wide x ¼ in. x 8 in.) long.
C. Concealed framings and supports shall be epoxy primed.

2.15 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM, CHANNELS & CLOSURES

A. General: Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown. Unless otherwise
indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with
continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices
wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for
coordination of assembly and installation with other work.

2.16 GRATINGS AND FLOOR DRAINS

A. Requirement is heavy duty steel Gratings: Please verify structural plan and
specifications, Plumbing for the details of the drawing.
B. Product used as basis for Stainless Steel Floor Drains : Jaman.

2.17 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by the hot-dip
process complying with the following requirements:
1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel
products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and
strip 0.76 mm (0.0299 inch ) thick and heavier.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning".
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP# "Power Tool Cleaning:
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete, or masonry, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1 {Paint Application Specification No. 1}
for shop painting.
1. Stripe paints to all edges, corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2. Provide epoxy primer.
D. Refer to Section 09 91 00-Painting, for final coats.

2.18 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AISI conform with the system established by the
American Iron and Steel Institute for designating finishes for stainless steel sheet.
B. Bright, Directional Polish: AISI No. 4 finish.

P a g e | 8 of 10
 Section 05 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.19 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Provide Powder coat finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions,
and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor
bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to the project
site.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners that is
necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include
threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag
bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free
of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete masonry or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have
been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field
connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding
work, and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded
surface matches those adjacent.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of steel and stainless steel that will come
into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood and dissimilar metals with a heavy
coat of bituminous paint.

P a g e | 9 of 10
 Section 05 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.3 INSTALLATION OF RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS

A. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space
balusters at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loading. Plumb
balusters and newel posts in each direction. Secure posts, balusters, and railing ends to
building construction as follows:
1. Anchor posts in concrete by core drilling holes are less than 127 mm (5 in.)
deep and 19.05 mm (3/4 inch) greater than the outside diameter of
post/baluster. Clean holes of all loose material, insert posts/balusters and fill
annular space between post/balusters and concrete with the following
anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's direction, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Non-shrink, non-metallic grout.
2. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and leave
3.175 mm (⅛ in. ) build-up, sloped away from post. For installations exposed on
exterior, or to flow of water, seal anchoring material to comply with grout
manufacturer's directions.
3. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with wrought or cast steel round
flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with lead
expansion shields and bolts, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used
for shop painting to comply with SSOC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted
surfaces
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0508
mm (2.0 mils).
B. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division-9
Section "PAINTING" of these specifications.
C. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply
galvanized repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

- END OF SECTION 05 50 00 –

P a g e | 10 of 10
 Section 07 13 16
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 07 13 16
Crystalline Waterproofing
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions Division-1 Specifications Section shall apply to work of this Section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. This Section includes Capillary-Type Waterproofing Systems for the following areas:
1. Ground Floor Toilets.
2. Nurse Station Clean Up Room.
3. Delivery Room.
4. Scrub up Area.
5. Operating Room.
6. X-ray Room.
7. Dark Room.
8. Breast Feeding.
9. Clinical Laboratory.
10. Phlebotomy Room.
11. Laboratory Receive Area.
12. Blood Bank.
B. Install capillary-type, crystalline waterproofing system in strict accordance with the
approved manufacturer’s printed instructions.

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Capillary type waterproofing system shall be permanently watertight and complies with
performance requirements specified:
1. Chemical resistance (ASTM C-267).
2. Permeability: Resist up to 125 lbs. per square inch of water pressure using
6000 psi test concrete.
3. Adhesive Resistance under water: 10,000 lbs. per square inch.
4. Bonding Capacity: Stronger than concrete tested based on 4,000 p.s.i. test
sample.
5. Compatibility: Produces no harmful effect on steel reinforcing or conduit.
B. Technical Data:
1. Final Set < 16 hours.
2. Flexural Strength 7 days 4.8 N/mm2 28 days 8.6 N/mm2.
3. Compression Strength 7 days > 25 N/mm2 28 days > 45 N/mm2.
4. Adhesion Strength > 1.2 N/mm2.

P a g e | 1 of 4
 Section 07 13 16
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

5. Resistant to hydrostatic 28 days > 0.8MPa pressure when applied on the

negative side.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete technical data and installation instructions for each type of capillary-type
waterproofing products.
B. Samples: 300mm x 300mm minimum size, of each capillary type waterproofing system
specified for Project.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer shall be with a minimum 3 year installation experience and who has completed
a capillary type waterproofing application similar to that indicated for Project.
B. Obtain capillary-type waterproofing materials of each type required from a single
manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by the manufacturer
of primary materials.
C. There shall be a pre-installation conference among the Architect, Owner and
manufacturer’s representative to review methods and procedures related to work,
including but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate, drains, curbs, penetrations and
other preparatory work performed by other trades.
2. Review waterproofing drawings and specifications.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule related to waterproofing work and
verify availability of materials as well as installer's capability to produce work.
4. Review required inspection, testing, and certifying procedures.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING

A. Deliver primary waterproofing materials to job site in manufacturer's original, unopened
containers with the following information:
1. Product name.
2. Product description.
3. Batch number under which product was produced.
4. National standards with which the product complies.
5. Application instructions.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Proceed with waterproofing operations only after substrate construction and
penetrating work have been completed.
B. Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed spaces during application of waterproofing and
maintain ventilation until work is complete and coatings have thoroughly cured.

1.8 PROJECT WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty period of ten (10) years.

P a g e | 2 of 4
 Section 07 13 16
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIER

A. Other equivalent products acceptable to the Architect.

2.2 PRODUCT
A. Colors shall be white.
B. Texture shall be smooth finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. The concrete surface must be clean and free from laitance, oils, grease, curing agents or
other foreign matters. If the surface is too smooth or highly contaminated with foreign
particles, sand-blast or acid etch surface before treatment.
B. Concrete surface must be sound. Route out visible cracks exceeding 0.4mm wide,
honeycombed pockets to depth of about 40mm and width of 25mm. Mix three parts of
the waterproofing system by crystallization to one part water by weight, until stiff
mortar consistency is achieved. Prime the concrete surface with one coat of
waterproofing system by crystallization before applying the mortar mix onto the area to
be patched, tightly sealing cavity.
C. Waterproofing system by crystallization must be applied on a damp substrate only to
ensure maximum chemical penetration. Pre-wet the substrate before the application of
the waterproofing system by crystallization. If concrete surfaces dry out before
application, it must be re-wetted.

3.2 MIXING
A. Mix 7.25 to 7.75 liters of clean water to 25 kg waterproofing system by crystallization.
Always mix the powder to the clean water by using a mechanical stirrer. Mix for 2
minutes until a smooth lump free consistency is achieved.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply a minimum of 2 coats in perpendicular directions, using block brush or roller. The
second coat must be applied while the first coat is still green but sufficiently set so that
it is not drawn off while applying the second coat.
B. The mixed material must not be applied at a temperature below 5°C or on a frozen
surface. At no instance should the total thickness exceed 5 mm. in a single application.
C. DRY SHAKE METHOD (NEGATIVE WATERPROOFING)
1. Sprinkle waterproofing system by crystallization powder directly from
packaging after allowing concrete to achieve initial set.

P a g e | 3 of 4
 Section 07 13 16
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Sprinkle waterproofing system by crystallization at the rate 3-3.5kg/m2 evenly

and trowel to required finish or power float.
D. DRY SHAKE METHOD (POSITIVE WATERPROOFING)
1. Sprinkle waterproofing system by crystallization powder directly from the
packaging at the rate of 2 kg./m2 evenly the lean concrete substrate just before
pouring of the concrete.
E. CURING
1. After the waterproofing system by crystallization coating has hardened, cure
the treated surface with a light mist of clean water at regular intervals three
times a day, for the initial two to three days. In extremely hot weather the curing
period may have to be extended to several days.
F. PROTECTION
1. Protection of waterproofing system by crystallization is not obligatory.
However if used on external areas, subjected to heavy rain, harsh sunlight or
frost, the finished application should be protected for at least 24 hours.

- END OF SECTION 07 13 1 –

P a g e | 4 of 4
 Section 07 13 26
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 07 13 26
Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Selection includes self-adhering modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate
joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with
adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Sample warranties.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by a waterproofing manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer’s Representative:
1. Inspect substrate prior to commencement of work, twice during application of
membrane and at commissioning to ascertain that air/vapor barrier system is
installed according to membrane manufacturer’s most current published
specifications and details.
2. Provide technical assistance to the applicator and assist where required in
correct installation of membrane.
3. Provide certificate of quality compliance upon satisfactory completion of
installation.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5
years documented experience with installation of air/ vapor barrier system. Complete
installation must be approved by the material manufacturer.

P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 07 13 26
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Applicator: Company that is currently licensed by a certifying organization must

maintain its license throughout the duration of the project.

1.8 MOCK-UPS
A. Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.
B. Construct typical panel, 10m2 minimum, incorporating wall openings, insulation,
building corner condition, illustrating materials interface and seals.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
E. Allow 48 hours for inspection of the mock-up by the Owner's Representative before
proceeding with air/vapor work.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 – Common
Product Requirements.
B. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions. Deliver membrane materials in factory wrapped packaging indicating name
of manufacturer and product.
C. Avoid spillage. Immediately notify the Owner's Representative if spillage occurs and
start clean up procedures.
D. Clean spills and leave the area as it was prior to spill. E. Store rolls materials on end in
original packaging.
F. Store primers at temperature 5 ̊C and above to facilitate handling. Keep solvent away
from open flame and excessive heat.
G. Project environmental requirements.
H. Do not install solvent curing sealants or vapor release adhesive materials in enclosed
spaces without ventilation.
I. Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities.
J. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by materials manufacturer before,
during and after installation.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard warranty in which manufacturer
and installer agree to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with
requirements or that fails to remain watertight within a specific warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Seven (7) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Any approved by the authorized person on the site.

P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 07 13 26
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.2 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING

A. Modified Bituminous Sheet, Fabric Reinforced: Minimum 60-mil (1.5mm) nominal
thickness, self-adhering sheet consisting of rubberized-asphalt membrane with
embedded fabric reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side.
1. Physical Properties
a. Pliability: No cracks when bent 180 degrees over a 25 mm. and at
minus 25 deg F (minus 32 deg C); ASTM D 146.
b. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf (180N) minimum; ASTM E 154.
c. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms (2.9ng/Pa x s x sq. m) maximum;
ASTM E 96/ E 96M, Water Method.
2. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, reinforced, rubberized-asphalt strips of the same
material and thickness as sheet waterproofing.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Primer: Liquid solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate by sheet waterproofing
material manufacturer.
C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for
substrate by sheet waterproofing material manufacturer.
D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid-applied, of trowel
grade or low viscosity.
E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, modified asphalt
coating.
F. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by ⅛ inch (25 by 3 mm) thick,
pre-drilled at 9-inch (229 mm) centers.
G. Protection Course: ASTM 6506, semi-grid sheets of fiberglass or mineral – reinforced-
asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as
follows:
1. Thickness: 6 mm, nominal.
2. Thickness: 3 mm, nominal, for vertical applications; 6 mm, nominal
elsewhere.
3. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing
manufacturer for protection course type.
H. Protection Course: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation, unfaced, ASTM C 578, Type X,
50 mm. thick.

P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 07 13 26
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Prepare surfaces and install modified bituminous sheets according to the waterproofing
manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in ASTM 6135.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas
that will be covered by sheet waterproofing on the same day. Reprime areas exposed
for more than 24 hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over the area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align
sheets and maintain uniform 64 mm minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal
seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F
(minus 4 and plus 5 deg C), install self-adhering, modified bituminous sheets
produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if
ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F (16 deg C)
D. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low to high points of decks to ensure that laps
shed water.
E. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks,
construction, and contraction joints.
F. Seal edges of sheet waterproofing terminations with mastic.
G. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing. H.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with
requirements. Slit and flatten fish mouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing
extending 150 mm. beyond repaired areas in all directions.
I. Immediately install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane
1. Insulation drainage panels may be used in place of a separate protection
course to vertical applications when approved by waterproofing manufacturer
and installed immediately.

3.2 MOLDED SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall
or deck substrate, according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Use adhesives or
other methods that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap the edges and ends of
geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during
subsequent construction.
1. For vertical applications, install a protection course before installing drainage
panels.

3.3 INSULATION DRAINAGE-PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces; cut and fit to within 19
mm. of projections and penetrations.
B. Ensure that drainage channels are aligned and free of obstructions.
P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 07 13 26
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

C. On vertical surfaces, set insulation drainage panels in adhesive or tape applied according
to manufacturer’s written instructions.
D. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation drainage panels according to
manufacturer’s written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly about insulation
units.

3.4 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.
B. Ensure all surfaces are clean, dry, sound, smooth, and continuous and comply with
membrane manufacturer’s requirements.
C. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Owner’s Representative in writing.
D. Do not start work until deficiencies have been corrected.

3.5 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose or foreign matter which might impair adhesion of materials.
B. Ensure all substrates are clean of oil or excess dust; all concrete surfaces free of large
voids, spilled areas or sharp protrusions.
C. Ensure all substrates are free of surface moisture prior to application of membrane and
primer.
D. Ensure metal closures are free of sharp edges and burrs.
E. Prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesive and sealants in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.

3.6 PROTECTION, REPAIR, AND CLEANING

A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with
requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by the manufacturer of affected construction.

-END OF SECTION 07 13 26-

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 07 16 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 07 16 00
Cementitious and Reactive Waterproofing
(Flexible Cementitious Type Waterproofing)
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions Division-1 Specifications Section shall apply to work of this Section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. This Section includes Flexible Cementitious Type Waterproofing Systems for the
following areas:
1. Second Floor Toilets.
2. Second Floor Terrace.
B. Install Flexible Cementitious Type Waterproofing System in strict accordance with
approved manufacturer’s printed instructions.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C109-92 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
B. ASTM D 4541 – Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable
Adhesion Testers, 2009.
C. ASTM D836 – Standard Test Methods for Crack Bridging, 2006.
D. ASTM D2240-05 – Standard Test Methods for Durometer Hardness.
E. ASTM D638 – Standard Test Methods for Elongation at break.
F. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.
G. ASTM E154 – Standard Test Methods for Puncture Resistance.
H. ASTM G53 – Standard Test Methods for Weather Resistance.
I. ASTM G26 – Standard Test Methods for Weatherometer.
J. ASTM 2369 – Standard Test Methods for Solid Content.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of waterproofing specified, submit manufacturer's printed
technical data, tested physical and performance properties, instructions for evaluating,
preparing, and treating substrates, and installation instructions.
B. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
C. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that:
1. Materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical
requirements.
2. Installer is qualified and approved by the manufacturer.

P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 07 16 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing and
approved by a waterproofing manufacturer for the installation of the specified
waterproofing system.
B. Mock-Up: Apply waterproofing system to 1.0 sq m of surface to demonstrate surface
preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness, texture, and standard of
workmanship.
1. Notify the Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when the
mock-up will be prepared.
2. If the Architect determines that the mock-up does not meet requirements,
reapply waterproofing until the mock-up is approved.
3. Retain and maintain approved mock-up during construction in undisturbed
condition as standard for judging completed waterproofing. Undamaged mock-
up may become part of the completed work.
C. Pre-installation Meeting: Hold a pre-installation meeting prior to application of
waterproofing system to ensure proper substrate and installation conditions; require
attendance of contractor and applicator; invite Architect and special inspector, if any.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protect adjacent areas not to be waterproofed. Where necessary, apply masking to
prevent staining of surfaces to remain exposed wherever the membrane abuts to other
finish surfaces.
B. Perform work only when existing and forecast weather conditions are within
manufacturer's recommendations for material and application method used; minimum
ambient temperature is 45 degrees F (7 degrees C).

1.7 PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS

A. Tensile Strength > 1.5N/ mm2
B. Elongation at Break > 150%
C. Adhesion to Concrete >0.3N/m2
D. Hardness Shore A >40
E. Improves Water Resistance of Concrete Passed DIN 1048
by more than 7 times @ 0.2kgf/cm2
F. Chemical Resistance Passed
G. NaOCl 0.5%
H. NH4OH 1.25%
I. HCl 3.7%
J. Toxicity Passed
K. Bridge cracks up to 2 mm. Passed
L. Chloride Content < 0.01%
M. Pot Life (@30°C) Approximately 2 hours
P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 07 16 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

N. Drying Time (30°C) Approximately 1-3 hours

O. Foot Trafficable 4 hours
P. Ponding Test 24 hours after application

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty document
executed by authorized company official; warranty period: 10 years commencing on
Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Installer’s Warranty: Provide warranty signed by installer as follows:
1. Installer warrants that, upon completion of the work, surfaces treated with
Greenseal waterproofing will remain free of water leakage resulting from
defective workmanship or materials for a period of 5 years from Date of
Substantial Completion.
2. In the event that water leakage occurs within the warranty period from such
causes, the installer shall, at his own expense, repair, replace, or otherwise
correct such defective workmanship and materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved equivalent by Architect/Engineer.

2.2 WATERPROOFING SYSTEM

1. Second Floor 3 Coats Flexible Cementitious Waterproofing with

Toilets Concrete Topping to be applied as per
2. Second Floor manufacturer’s specification
Terrace

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems will be
applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean concrete surfaces to ensure the surfaces are free from oil, grease,
paint, loose dust, mud and laitance.
B. Honeycombs should be hacked off to expose the concrete.

P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 07 16 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

C. All chipped or loose particles should be removed, the surface cleaned with water before
repairing.
D. Apply Injection Grout to areas that were hacked.
E. Power float or steel trowel the surface to receive the waterproofing material.
F. Angle Fillet
1. All junctions between the slabs and walls, do an angle fillet of 25 mm. x 25
mm. with Injection Grout.
2. Mix 3 parts of Injection Grout to 1 part water to mix thoroughly to a mortar
consistency and apply with a trowel to form an angle fillet.
G. Outlet and Pipe Penetration
1. Hack a V groove joint with a depth of 25mm surrounding the outlets and
pipes.
2. Wash thoroughly the hacked surfaces between the outlet pipe and the
concrete.
3. Mix 3 parts of Injection Grout to 1 part water to mix thoroughly to a mortar
consistently and apply with a trowel into the hacked V groove and level it to the
concrete level.

3.3 MIXING
A. Put Flexible Cementitious Waterproofing System liquid into a clean mixing container.
Add Flexible Cementitious Waterproofing System Powder gradually while mixing until a
lump free plastic consistency is achieved. NO ADDITION OF WATER IS ALLOWED. It is
recommended that mechanical mixing (400-500 rpm) should be used for 2-3 minutes to
ensure proper dispersion of the components.

3.4 APPLICATION METHOD

A. Pre-wet the surface with clean water. Do not allow water ponding.
B. Very porous surface must be primed with acrylic primer prior to applying flexible
cementitious waterproofing. Prime the surface before applying flexible cementitious
waterproofing.
C. Apply the mixed material onto the prepared surface using a clock brush, squeegee or
roller in a stippling action.
D. Apply 1-2 coats finish depending on site conditions and film thickness required. If a
trowel is used for application, all undulating or uneven areas must be patched to level
before applying the flexible cementitious waterproofing system to prevent material
from building up too thick in one application.
E. Before a 2nd coat is applied, the 1st coat must be left for approximately 2-3 hours
depending on the thickness, substrate porosity and the temperature until it is dry and
tacky.
F. Flexible cementitious waterproofing must be protected by rendering or screeding after
application.

P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 07 16 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.5 CURING
A. Freshly applied waterproofing should be protected from direct rain, dirt, oil, grease and
other loose particles for at least 12 hours.
B. Foot traffic is allowed after 24 hours and resistant to light mechanical stress after 3
days. Permanent water pressure resistance shall be achieved after full hardening of 7
days.

3.6 CLEANING EQUIPMENT

A. All tools and equipment should be cleaned immediately with clean water after use.
Hardened material can only be removed mechanically.

3.7 HEALTH & SAFETY

A. Product contains cement, which may cause dermatitis. Wear rubber gloves when
handling the product. In case of insufficient ventilation, put on suitable respiratory
equipment. Do not apply the product when the surface temperature is below 5°C or
greater than 45°C. Product is classified as non-hazardous. Refer to the safety data
sheet.

- END OF SECTION 07 16 00 –

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 07 21 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 07 21 00
Thermal Insulation
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, and Division 1 specifications sections, shall apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass-fiber blanket.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing
2. Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board for sound attenuation blanket used as
acoustic insulation.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating post-consumer and pre
consumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.
3. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with
requirements for low-emitting materials.
4. Laboratory Test Reports: For Insulation, indicating compliance with
requirements for low-emitting materials.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
B. Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES or Underwriters
Laboratories.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with a
manufacturer’s written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during
installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to a necessary extent for a period of
installation and concealment.
P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 07 21 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board

materials to the Project site until just before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board
insulation in each area of construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as approved by the
authorized person on the site.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.
2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke developed indexes of 75 and 450,
respectively, per ASTM E 84.
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water
barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to
substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. C. Eave Ventilation
Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit
between roof framing members and to provide ventilation between insulated
attic spaces and vented eaves.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing
projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with
insulation attachment.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer’s written instructions applicable to products and
applications.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left
exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop the entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.

P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 07 21 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

D. Provide sizes to fit applications and select from manufacturer’s standard thicknesses,
widths, and lengths. Apply a single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION

A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer’s
recommended adhesives according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below
exterior grade line.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer’s written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from
exterior walls.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION

A. Butt panels together for tight fit.
B. Anchor Installation: Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively
attached spindle-type insulation anchors as follows. or as approved by the
Architect/Engineer.
1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor
adhesive according to anchor manufacturer’s written instructions. Space anchors
according to insulation manufacturer’s written instructions for insulation type,
thickness, and application.
2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated on
Drawings between concrete substrate and insulation.
3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into
position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining
washers, taking care not to compress insulation.
4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply
capped washers to tips of spindles.
C. Adhesives Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or damp
proofing according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches
o.c. both ways inside of the face and as recommended by the manufacturer. Fit courses
insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both
directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.
1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-
piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 04 20 00 “Unit
Masonry”.

P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 07 21 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Cellular-Glass Board Insulation: Install with closely fitting joints using serrated trowel
attachment method according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the
following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths
that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not
rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
4. Attics: Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in
insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.
5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches support
unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by tapping flanges of
insulation to flanges of metal studs.
6. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and
as follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over
flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once
finish material is installed over it.
7. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder
facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight
installation.
B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal
maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 40kg/cu.m.
2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer’s written
instructions.
C. Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer’s written
instructions. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle
to uniform density, but do not compact excessively.
D. Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to
manufacturer’s written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes,
ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows,
electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After
insulation is applied, make the face of the studs by using a method recommended by
the insulation manufacturer.

P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 07 21 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.7 INSTALLATION OF REFLECTIVE INSULATION

A. Install sheet reflective insulation according to ASTM C 727.
B. Install sheet radiant barriers according to ASTM C 1744.
C. Install interior radiation control coating system according to ASTM C 1321.

3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical
abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is
subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.

-END OF SECTION 07 21 00-

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 07 22 16.13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 07 22 16.13
Rigid Polystyrene Roof Board Insulation
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Extruded polystyrene rigid board insulation for conventional roof membrane
assemblies.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C36/C36M-01: Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.
B. ASTM C208-95 (2001): Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board.
C. ASTM C518-[04]: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
D. ASTM C578-[06]: Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Insulation.
E. ASTM D1621-[04a]: Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular
Plastics.
F. ASTM D2842-[01]: Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
G. ASTM E96/E96M-[05]: Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide continuity of thermal insulation at building enclosure assemblies and spaces in
conjunction with thermal insulating materials specified in Section 07 21 00 Thermal
Insulation.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit Shop Drawings as specified in Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate degree of slope and layout of sloping boards and fill boards on
roof surfaces. Ensure positive drainage to roof drains.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data (and manufacturer’s installation instructions) as specified in
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Provide manufacturer’s technical data for each type of insulation.
2. Include product characteristics and performance criteria: aged thermal
resistance values, fire performance characteristics, moisture vapor permeance,
water absorption ratings, compressive strengths, evaluation reports showing
conformance to applicable codes for polystyrene insulations.
C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures for preparation and
installation specific to the work of this section.
P a g e | 1 of 3
 Section 07 22 16.13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store, handle and protect Products as specified in Section 01 60 00 Product
Requirements.
B. Handle products carefully, ensuring board corners are not broken and boards are not
damaged.
C. Do not store products exposed to direct sunlight. If stored outdoors, cover the product
with light-colored opaque tarpaulins to protect from solar radiation.
D. Store products away from construction activity and sources of ignition.
E. Protect products from damage during handling, installation and at point of installation.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation only when surfaces and ambient temperatures are within
manufacturer’s prescribed limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Flat Roof Board Insulation: Extruded polystyrene board to ASTM C578, Type IV, rigid,
closed cell type, with integral high density skin.
1. Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518): typical 5 year aged value of R-5 per 1 inch of
thickness.
2. Board Size: [24" x 96"] [48" x 96"].
3. Board Thickness: [2] [2-1/2] [3] [4] inch thick] [as indicated on Drawings].
4. Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621): Minimum 25 psi.
5. Water Absorption (ASTM D2842): 0.7% by volume maximum.
6. Edges: Square. 7. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96/96M): maximum 1.1
perms.
8. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Values (ASTM E84): 5/165.
B. Tapered Roof Board Insulation: Extruded polystyrene board to ASTM C578, Type IV,
rigid, closed cell type, with integral high density skin.
1. Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518): typical 5 year aged value of R-5 per 1 inch of
thickness.
2. Board Size: 24" x 96".
3. Board Slope: [⅛ inch per foot] [¼ inch per foot] [½ inch per foot].
4. Compressive Strength: Minimum 25 psi.
5. Water Absorption (ASTM D2842): 0.7% by volume maximum.
6. Edges: Square.
7. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): maximum 1.5 perms.
8. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Values (ASTM E84): 5/165.
C. Thermal Barrier: ½ inch (13 mm) thick gypsum board, tapered edges, ivory faced fire
rated board; to ASTM C36, Type X; UL labeled.

P a g e | 2 of 3
 Section 07 22 16.13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

D. Overlay Board: ½ inch thick high density fiberboard

E. Mechanical Fasteners: screw-type, 6 ga. (4.8mm), self-drilling, galvanized steel;
sufficient length to securely anchor the system into place and to withstand all super-
imposed loads, complete with 1½ inch (38mm) diameter 14 ga. (1.8mm) thick galvanized
steel discs.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that the insulation boards and adjacent materials are compatible.
B. Verify that the substrate is sound, clean, and free of oil, grease, and materials or
substances that may impede adhesive bond.
C. Verify the roof if it has adequate slope to ensure positive drainage.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply flat fill and sloped roof insulation boards in accordance with layout indicated on
Shop Drawings.
B. Mechanically fasten insulation boards to substrate at UL required spacing.
C. Apply insulation boards parallel to roof perimeter long edges. Stagger end joints.
D. Lay insulation boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing.
E. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through the
roof.
F. Cut boards to slope for a distance of 24 inches back from roof drains for positive
drainage.
G. Apply no more insulation than can be covered with roofing membrane in the same day.
H. Keep insulation minimum 3 inches from heat emitting devices, and minimum 2 inches
from sidewalls of Type A chimneys and Type B and L vents.
I. Install single layer of overlay board, with joints staggered over insulation joints.

-END OF SECTION 07 22 16.13-

P a g e | 3 of 3
 Section 07 84 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

SECTION 07 84 00
Firestopping
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification Section, apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated
construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and
hot gases through penetrations in, or construction joints between, fire rated wall and
floor assemblies.

1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows:
A. Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical
busways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions),
horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and
partitions.
B. Safing slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and curtain walls.
C. Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors.
D. Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.
E. Expansion joints in walls and floors.
F. Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partitions or walls containing fire doors.
G. Openings around structural members which penetrate floors or walls.

1.4 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS

A. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly
execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of
other sections, including:
1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

1.5 REFERENCES
A. Test Requirements: ASTM E 814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration
Firestops"
B. Test Requirements: UL 1479, “Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops”
C. Test Requirements: UL 2079, “Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems”
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL publishes tested systems in their "FIRE
RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually.
P a g e | 1 of 8
 Section 07 84 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. UL Fire Resistance Directory:

a. Firestop Devices (XHJI).
b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH).
c. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ).
d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW).
e. Forming Materials (XHKU).
f. Joint Systems (XHBN).
g. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems (XHDG).
2. Alternate Systems: “Omega Point Laboratories Directory” (updated annually).
E. Test Requirements: ASTM E 1966, “Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint
Systems”.
F. Test Requirements: ASTM E 2307, “Standard Test Method for Determining Fire
Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test
Apparatus”.
G. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of
Installed Fire Stops”.
H. ASTM E 84, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials”.
I. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering
Judgments.
J. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC.
K. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
L. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration fire stop systems and
fire-resistive joint systems that comply with specified requirements of tested systems.
B. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E 814, UL 1479 or UL
2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being
penetrated.
C. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes
having local jurisdiction.
D. Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing
partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the
structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.
E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no qualified tested system is
available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar
qualified tested system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities
having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineering
judgment documents must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop
Council.

P a g e | 2 of 8
 Section 07 84 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material
including the composition and limitations, documentation of qualified tested firestop
systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions to comply with Section
1300.
B. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and document details
when no qualified tested system is available for an application. Engineering judgment
must include both project name and contractor’s name who will install the firestop
system as described in the document.
C. Submit material safety data sheets provided with products delivered to the job-site.

1.8 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the
firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install
manufacturer’s products per specified requirements. A supplier’s willingness to sell its
firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor
does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.
B. Installation Responsibility: assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems
and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single sole source firestop specialty
contractor.
C. The work is to be installed by a contractor with at least one of the following
qualifications:
1. FM 4991 Approved Contractor.
2. UL Approved Contractor.
3. Accredited Firestop Specialty Contractor.
D. Firm with not less than 3 years’ experience with firestop installation.
E. Successfully completed not less than 3 comparable scale projects using similar systems.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers,
identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable.
B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum
storage time at the job-site.
C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with
manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions.
D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material
safety data sheets as applicable.
E. Do not use damaged or expired materials.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.

P a g e | 3 of 8
 Section 07 84 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation

but prior to covering or concealing of openings.
C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory
conditions before proceeding.
D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when
temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation
printed on product label and product data sheet.
E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials
from contaminating any adjacent surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the
substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material.
Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the
qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.
C. Firestopping Materials are either “cast-in-place” (integral with concrete placement) or
“post installed.” Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to concrete placement.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ), joint systems
(XHBN), and perimeter firestop systems (XHDG) listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire
Resistance Directory of the following manufacturers as identified below:
1. Provide products as approved by the authorized person on the site.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E 814 or UL 2079 tested for
specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type,
penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each
separate instance.
B. Pre-installed firestop devices for use with noncombustible and combustible pipes
(closed and open systems), conduit, and/or cable bundles penetrating concrete floors
and/or gypsum walls.
C. Sealants, caulking materials, or foams for use with non-combustible items including
steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
D. Sealants or caulking materials for use with sheet metal ducts.
E. Sealants, caulking or spray materials for use with fire-rated construction joints and other
gaps.

P a g e | 4 of 8
 Section 07 84 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

F. Pre-formed mineral wool designed to fit flutes of metal profile deck and gap between
top of wall and metal profile deck; as a backer for spray material.
G. Intumescent sealants, caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants
consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible
cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe.
H. Foams, intumescent sealants, or caulking materials for use with flexible cable or cable
bundles.
I. Non-curing, re-penetrable intumescent putty or foam materials for use with flexible
cable or cable bundles.
J. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified
nonmetallic outlet boxes.
K. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe
(closed and open piping systems).
L. Materials used for large openings and complex penetrations made to accommodate
cable trays and bundles, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in
raceways.
M. Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to
accommodate cable trays and bundles, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical
busways in raceways.
N. Sealants or caulking materials used for openings between structurally separate sections
of wall and floors.
O. For blank openings made in fire-rated wall or floor assemblies, where future penetration
of pipes, conduits, or cables is expected.
P. Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E814
which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.
Q. Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079 which is
equal to the time rating of construction joint assembly.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be
performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application
of materials.
2. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt,
grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other
substances that may affect proper adhesion.
3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent
surfaces by firestopping materials.
4. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity
conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.
P a g e | 5 of 8
 Section 07 84 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

5. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings, penetrations and construction joints to ensure
that the fire stop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to
accommodate through-penetration firestop systems. Coordinate construction and sizing
of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified
requirements.
C. Coordinate fire stopping with other trades so that obstructions are not placed in the
way prior to the installation of the fire stop systems.
D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop and joint system installations that will
become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined
by the building inspector, per requirements of Section 109, International Building Code
2000, ed.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials with accordance to the UL Fire
Resistance Directory or Omega Point Laboratories Directory.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of
through-penetration and construction joint materials.
1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water
resistant seal.
2. Consult the mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer
prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance
of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.
3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or
enclosing areas.
B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.
C. Inspection of through-penetration firestopping shall be performed in accordance with
ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Firestops” or other
recognized standards.
D. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or
penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades.
E. Manufacturer’s Field Services: During Installation, provide periodic destructive testing
inspections to assure proper installation/application. After installation is complete,
submit findings in writing indicating whether or not the installation of the tested system
identified was installed correctly.

P a g e | 6 of 8
 Section 07 84 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.5 IDENTIFICATION & DOCUMENTATION

A. The firestop contractor is to supply documentation for each single application addressed.
This documentation is to identify each penetration and joint location on the entire
project.
1. The Documentation Form for through penetrations is to include:
a. A Sequential Location Number.
b. The Project Name.
c. Date of Installation.
d. Detailed description of the penetration location.
e. Tested System or Engineered Judgment Number.
f. Type of assembly penetrated.
g. A detailed description of the size and type of penetrating item.
h. Size of opening.
i. Number of sides of assemblies addressed.
j. Hourly rating to be achieved.
k. Installer's Name.
2. The Documentation Form for Construction Joints is to include:
a. A Sequential Location Number.
b. The Project Name.
c. Date of Installation.
d. Detailed description of the Construction Joints location.
e. Tested System or Engineered Judgment Number.
f. Type of Construction Joint.
g. The Width of the Joint.
h. The Lineal Footage of the Joint.
i. Number of sides addressed.
j. Hourly rating to be achieved.
k. Installer's Name.
l. Copies of these documents are to be provided to the general contractor
at the completion of the project.
B. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive,
pre-printed vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated
construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be
visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the
following information on labels:
1. The words: "Warning -Through Penetration Firestop System-Do Not Disturb.
Notify Building Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's Name, address, and phone number.
3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and
inspection agency.
4. Date of Installation.
5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
P a g e | 7 of 8
 Section 07 84 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

6. Installer's Name.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving the area undamaged, clean condition.
B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop
materials and soiling as work progresses.

3.7 LABOR USE TO INSTALL FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

A. To ensure complete harmony on the project site, the installation of each scope of work
is to be performed jurisdictionally correct per existing trade agreements.

- END OF SECTION 07 84 00 –

P a g e | 8 of 8
 Section 07 84 20
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

SECTION 07 84 20
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification Section, apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated
construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and
hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies.

1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

Only tested and listed firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows:
A. Safing slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and perimeter curtain walls.
B. Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors.
C. Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.
D. Expansion joints in walls and floors.

1.4 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS

A. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly
execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of
other sections, including:
1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 07 84 13 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems.
3. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealers.

1.5 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Fire Resistance Directory, Volume II, updated
annually:
1. Joint Systems (XHBN).
2. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems (XHDG).
3. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH).
4. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW).
5. Forming Materials (XHKU).
B. Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (OPL) Listed Products Directory, Volume II, updated
annually:
1. Fire Resistant Joint Systems.
C. ASTM E 1966, “Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems”.
D. ASTM E 1399, “Test Method for Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimum and
Maximum Joint Width of Architectural Joint Systems”.

P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 07 84 20
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

E. ASTM E 84, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials”.
F. ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops”.
G. ASTM E 2307, “Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Endurance of Perimeter
Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus”.
H. ANSI/UL 2079, “Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems”.
I. International Firestop Council Recommended (IFC) Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop
Systems Engineering Judgments.
J. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC.
K. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site during the
initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper
selection and installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturer's written
recommendations published in their literature and drawing details.
B. Firestop System installation shall meet requirements of ASTM E 1966 and/or ANSI/UL
2079 tested and listed assemblies that provide fire-resistance ratings not less than that
of the construction in which the joint occurs.
C. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes
having local jurisdiction.
D. Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing
partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the
structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.
E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no tested and listed system is
available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar tested
system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction
for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineering judgment documents
shall follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council.

1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material
including the composition and limitations, documentation of tested firestop systems to
be used and manufacturer's installation instructions to comply with Section 1300.
B. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and details when no tested
and listed system is available for an application. Engineering judgment shall include both
project name and contractor’s name who will install the firestop system as described in
the document.
C. Submit material safety data sheets provided with products delivered to the job-site.

P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 07 84 20
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.8 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the
firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install
manufacturer’s products per specified requirements. A manufacturer’s willingness to
sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the
Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.
B. The work is to be installed by a contractor with at least one of the following
qualifications:
1. FM 4991 Approved Contractor.
2. UL Approved Contractor.
3. Accredited Firestop Specialty Contractor.
C. Installer shall have not less than 3 years’ experience with firestop installation.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers,
identified with brand, type, and UL or OPL label, where applicable.
B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum
storage time at the job-site.
C. Store materials with cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with
manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions.
D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material
safety data sheets as applicable.
E. Do not use damaged or expired materials.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.
B. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation
but prior to covering or concealing of openings.
C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory
conditions before proceeding.
D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when
temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation
printed on product label and product data sheet.
E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials
from contaminating any adjacent surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other and
substrates forming joints under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated
by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 07 84 20
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Provide components for each fire-resistive joint system that are needed to install fill
material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and
approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated
systems.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with joint systems (XHBN) listed in Volume II of the UL Fire
Resistance Directory or OPL Listed Products Directory provide products of the following
manufacturer as approved by the authorized person on the site.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Use only firestop products that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 1966
and/or ANSI/UL 2079 for specific rated construction conditions conforming to
construction assembly type, movement capability, spacing requirements, and fire-
resistance-rating involved for each separate instance.
B. Sealants for use with fire-resistance-rated construction joints.
C. Sealants for use as part of a Perimeter Fire Barrier System between fire-resistance-rated
floors and exterior wall assemblies.
D. Pre-formed mineral wool designed to fit flutes of metal profile deck and gap between
top of the wall and metal deck profile.
E. Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by ASTM E 1966
and/or ANSI/UL 2079 which is equal to the fire-resistance ratings of the construction in
which the joint occurs.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be
performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
1. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt,
grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other
substances that may affect proper adhesion.
2. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent
surfaces by firestopping materials.
3. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity
conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.
4. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire
Resistance Directory or Omega Point Laboratories Listed Products Directory.

P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 07 84 20
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of

construction joint materials.
1. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Examine sealed joints to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing
areas.
B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities and/or
independent inspection agency.
C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or
penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.
B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop
materials and soiling as work progresses.

- END OF SECTION 07 84 20 –

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 07 92 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 07 92 00
Joint Sealants
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions Division-1 Specifications Section shall apply to work of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of each form and type of joint sealer is indicated on the drawings and schedules.
B. This section includes joint sealers for the following locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces as
indicated below:
a. Concrete and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Control and expansion joints in overhead surfaces.
c. Joints at aluminum window frame terminations to adjacent material.
d. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
e. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces as
indicated below:
a. Joints between non-load-bearing unit masonry walls and cast-in-place
concrete slabs and beams, and columns; fire rated and non-rated.
b. Tile and stone control and expansion joints.
c. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and
concrete walls and partitions.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior
doors, windows, and elevator entrances.
e. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
f. At surrounding areas of toilet and plumbing fixtures and wall surfaces
and lavatories.
g. Other joints as indicated.

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Provide joint sealers that are produced and installed to establish and maintain
watertight and airtight continuous seals.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete manufacturer’s product data for each joint sealer product required, including
instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application.

P a g e | 1 of 6
 Section 07 92 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. For initial selection purposes, submit the manufacturer's standard bead samples
consisting of strips of actual products showing the full range of colors available for each
product exposed to view.
C. For verification purposes submit each type and color of joint sealer required. Install joint
sealer samples in 12 mm wide joints formed between two 150mm strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealers.
D. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply
with specifications requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Engage an Installer who has completed within the last 5 years at least 5 joint sealer
applications similar in type and size to that of this project. Installer shall submit
certificate of authorization from joint sealer manufacturer.
B. Obtain Joint Sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product
required.
C. Field Constructed Mock-Up: Prior to installation of joint sealers, apply elastomeric
sealant to each type of building for further verification of colors selected from sample
submittals and to represent completed work for qualities of appearance, materials, and
application:
1. Include joints in field-constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other
sections which are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealant specified in this
section.
2. Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed
construction.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period
for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendation to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,
contaminants, or other causes.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits
permitted by joint sealer manufacturers.
2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, condensation, or other causes.
B. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed
by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants capable of
interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
P a g e | 2 of 6
 Section 07 92 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.8 SEQUENCING & SCHEDULING

A. Sequence installation of joint sealers to occur not less than 21 not more than 30 days
after completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with
one another, with joint substrates and with waterproofing materials, under conditions
of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
B. Colors of exposed joint sealer shall be as selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s
standard colors.

2.2 JOINT SEALANT

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer
indicated which complies with ASTM C920 requirements, including those reference for
Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
B. Two-Part Non-sag Polysulfide Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 12-1/2; Uses NT, M, G, A,
and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
C. Two-Part Pourable Polysulfide Sealant: Type M; Grade P; Class 12-1/2; Uses T, M, G, A,
and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
D. One-Part Polysulfide Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as
applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
E. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS; class 25; Uses NT, G, A,
and, as applicable to non-porous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with
fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with non-porous substrates and subject to
in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.
F. Acceptable Manufacturer:

P a g e | 3 of 6
 Section 07 92 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Substrate Interface Products Comments

Exterior & interior horizontal

joints: stone & masonry,
mortar, concrete

Equal Exterior & interior vertical

joints for the following
substrate interface:

a. Concrete, stone, and masonry

b. Metal to concrete,
stone, and masonry

c. Metal frames in exterior walls

and exterior overhead joints

d. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures

P a g e | 4 of 6
 Section 07 92 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.3 COMPRESSION SEALS

A. Preformed Hollow Neoprene Gasket: Manufacturer’s standard preformed
polychloroprene elastomeric joint seal of the open-cell compression type complying
with ASTM D 2628: “Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals
for Concretre Pavements” and with requirements indicated for size, profile and cross-
sectional design.

2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are non-staining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience
and laboratory testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-waxing, non-extruding
strips of flexible, non-gassing plastic foam of material indicated below; nonabsorbent to
water and gas; and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
1. Either open-cell polyurethane foam or closed-cell polyethylene foam, unless
otherwise indicated, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold-
applied sealant only.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM or silicone tubing complying
with ASTM D 1056, non-absorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at
temperature down to -26 degree F (-15degree C). Provide products with low
compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant
depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.
D. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tapes as recommended by
sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler
materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant
failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer.
B. Chemical Cleaners for Non-Porous Surfaces: Non-staining and of type acceptable to
manufacturers of sealant and sealant backing materials; not harmful to substrates and
adjacent non-porous materials, and do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a
detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance.
C. Masking Tape: non-staining, non-absorbent type compatible with joint sealant and to
surfaces adjacent to joints
D. Accessory Materials for Fire-Stopping Sealant: Provide forming, joint fillers, packing and
other accessory materials required for installation of fire-stopping sealant as applicable
to installation conditions indicated.

P a g e | 5 of 6
 Section 07 92 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer present and do not
proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and dry all surfaces by removing foreign matter and contaminants such as oil,
dust, grease, frost, water, dirt, old sealants and any protective coating. Dust and loose
particles should be blown out of joints or vacuum cleaned. Non-porous surfaces may
require preparation/priming, refer to primer selection guide. Cleaning solvents should
not be allowed to dry or evaporate without being wiped with a clean, dry cloth.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint
sealer manufacturer.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS

A. Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: ASTM C 962.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: ASTM C919.
D. Install joint fillers of the type indicated to provide support of sealant during application
and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed
sealant relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Install sealant by proven techniques that result in sealant directly contacting and fully
wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint
configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint
widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Non-Sag Sealant: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time
skinning or curing begins, tool sealant to form smooth, uniform heads of configuration
indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to the joint.
Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealant or adjacent surfaces or are not
approved by sealant manufacturers.

- END OF SECTION 07 16 16 –

P a g e | 6 of 6
 Section 08 11 19
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

SECTION 08 11 19
Steel Doors and Frames
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Division-
1 Specifications Sections shall apply to work of this section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Extent of steel doors and frames and type according to design and insulation
requirement, are indicated on door schedules and drawings.
B. Types of metal doors include the following (Verify Design and Location):
1. Double Swing Steel Door with Vision Glass and Door Closer.
2. Swing-in Steel Door with Vision Glass and Door Closer.
3. Swing-in Steel Door with 3mm thick Lead Lining, Lead-lined Vision Glass, Door
closer and Red Light Indicator that X-ray Machine is Operational.
4. Swing-out Steel Louvered Door.
5. Swing-in Steel Louvered Door.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute “Recommended
Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames” (SDI-100) and as herein specified. B.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated or
required, provide fire-rated door and frame assemblies that comply with NFPA 80
“Standard for Fire Doors and Windows”, and have been tested, listed, and labeled in
accordance with ASTM E 152: “Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies” by a
nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire Rating: As indicated in the schedule of doors, labeled according to UL10B.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete manufacturer’s technical product data substantiating that the product comply
with the requirements.
B. Shop Drawings for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details
of each frame type, elevations of door design, types, conditions at openings, details of
construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and
reinforcements for hardware installation, and details of joints and connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using the same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on contract drawings.

P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 08 11 19
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Indicate and coordinate glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing
requirements.
C. Full assembly sample for Architect’s approval; one sample, 600 mm square of each
design showing fully welded head and jamb intersection and anchorage methodology.
D. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required being fire-rated and
exceeding size of tested assemblies, submitting manufacturer’s certification that each
door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and
construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
E. Certificates of Conformance: Certify that doors, frames and accessories meet the
requirements specified herein. Include the grade and model of each door.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Deliver steel doors cartooned or crated to provide protection during transit and job
storage.
B. Strap welded frames in pairs, with one frame inverted or provide temporary steel
spreaders securely fastened to the bottom of each frame.
C. Inspect steel doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be
repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable
to the authorized person on the site; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as
directed.
D. Store doors and frames at the building site in a dry area with cover. Place units off
ground. Avoid using non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity
chamber. If the door or frame becomes wet, remove from the wet location and dry
immediately. Provide spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Non-Rated Steel Doors: ANSI/SDI 100, except as specified otherwise. Provide paper
honeycomb door filling. Non-fire-rated doors shall have Ga. #18 faces, Ga. #16 hinge
and lock rails, and Ga. #16 top and bottom channels. Prepare doors to receive hardware
specified in Section 08710-Finish Hardware. Doors shall have top edge closed flush.
Doors shall be 44 mm thick unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fire-Rated Steel Door System: Insulation shall be glass fiberboard, rockwool or paper
honeycomb, as per approved manufacturer’s standard system. Interior fire rated doors
shall have Ga. #18 faces, Ga. #14 jamb. Doors and frames shall be bonderized and
provided with one-coat of baked-on prime coat paint. Prepare doors to receive
hardware specified in Section 08710-Finish Hardware.
C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366
and ASTM A 568.
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 14-gauge galvanized sheet steel for
steel doors and painted with rust-inhibitive paint.
P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 08 11 19
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Wall Anchors: a minimum of four anchors for each jamb. Locate anchors
opposite each hinge location and in the same relative position on the strike side
jamb.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors drilled for 9.525 mm (⅜ inch) anchor
bolts at bottom of each jamb member. Where floor fill occurs, terminate bottom
of frames at the indicated finished floor levels and support by adjustable
extension clips resting on and anchored to the structural slabs.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard units, except hot-dip galvanize
items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as
applicable.
F. Weather-Stripping and Sound-Stripping for Jambs, Heads and Sills: Shall be as shown on
the drawings and as indicated in Section 08710-Finish Hardware. G. Shop Applied Primer
and Site-Applied Finish:
1. Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as
a base for specified finish paints.
2. Finish: Lacquer enamel, refer to Section 09900; jobsite applied.
H. Provide 6mm thick, clear wired glass as vision panels for fire rated doors as indicated on
schedules.
1. Refer to Division 8, Section 08800: For wire glass specifications and other glass
and glazing requirements.

2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from
defects, warp or buckle. Fully weld corners of frames at all locations. Fit and assemble
units in the manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently
factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at the project site.
B. Fabricate exposed faces of interior doors panels, including stiles & rails of non-flush
units, from only cold-rolled steel.
C. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frame from stainless steel sheet, unless otherwise
indicated. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door
construction or by addition of minimum 16-gauge inverted steel channels. Provide
weather-stripping or sound-stripping were indicated as approved by the authorized
person on the site .
D. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads
for exposed screws and bolts at hinges. Do not allow through bolts for surface mounted
hardware. Provide internal reinforcement to attach all hardware.
E. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and
concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and
templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI
A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Refer to Section
08710-Finish Hardware.

P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 08 11 19
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

F. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface-applied finish hardware shall be done at factory. All reinforcement at exterior
doors should be stainless steel.
1. Hinges: Ga. 8 reinforcement.
2. For overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing and provisions
for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable: # 14 gauge.
G. Locate finish hardware as indicated in the door schedule and approved shop drawings.
H. Shop Primer Painting:
1. Clean, treat, and primer paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units.
2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign
materials before application of paint.
I. Door Louvers: See schedule of doors.
1. Non-Rated Doors: Provide sight-proof stationary louvers for interior doors
where indicated, constructed of inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades as
indicated, formed of 18-gauge cold-rolled steel, and 14-gauge steel jamb.
2. Rated Doors: Provide fire louvers with automatic release fusible link at 13
degrees Fahrenheit. Sizes are to be governed by UL requirements.

2.4 STEEL DOOR FRAMES

A. General: Provide steel frames for steel doors, and stainless steel frames for stainless
steel doors, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered and fully welded corners.
2. Form exterior frames of exterior doors.
B. Standard Steel Frames: ANSI/SDI 100. Form frames to sizes and shapes indicated, with
fully welded corners. Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, cased
openings, interior glazed panels, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Welded Frames: Continuously weld frame faces at corner joints. Mechanically
interlock or continuously weld stops and rabbets. Grind welds smoothly.
2. Provide integral stops.
3. Provide Ga. 16 frames.
C. Fire Doors & Frames: NFPA 80 and these specifications. The requirements of NFPA 80
shall take precedence over details indicated or specified.
1. Labels: Fire doors and frames shall bear the label of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM), or
Warnock Hersey International (WHI) attesting to the rating required. Testing
shall be in accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 108BV. Labels shall be permanently
affixed at the factory to frames and to the hinge edge of the door. Door labels
shall not be painted.
D. Plaster Guards: Provide 24-gauge steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame,
at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct
hardware operation and to close-off interior of openings.

P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 08 11 19
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final
shop drawings, manufacturer’s data, and as herein specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 “Recommended Erection Instructions
for Steel Frames” unless otherwise indicated.
1. Except for frames located at in-place concrete or masonry and at drywall
installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
Set frames accurately in position, plumb, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove
temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
2. Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Std. No. 80.
C. Door Installation:
1. Fit metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100.
2. Place fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80.

3.2 ADJUST & CLEAN

A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, fill and sand smooth any dusted,
rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying
primer.
B. Final Adjustments: Check and re-adjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel
doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.

- END OF SECTION 08 11 19 –

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 08 14 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 08 14 00
Wood Doors
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specifications Section shall apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent and location of each type of wood doors and plastic doors is indicated on
drawings and in schedules.
B. Types of wood and doors required include (Verify Design and Location):
1. Swing-in/out Marine Flush Door.
2. Swing-in/out Wooden Flush Door.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate location and size of each door, elevation of each door,
construction details not covered in product data including those for stiles, panels;
location and extent of hardware cutouts.
B. Samples: Corner section, 300 mm square, showing edges, faces, joinery and material
qualities of typical style, rail, molding and panel for each exposed material, and door
type.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain panel wood doors from a single manufacturer.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING

1. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling
and deterioration. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and with applicable
requirements of referenced door standard.
2. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with the
shop drawing designation system for doors, frames and hardware, using
temporary, removable or concealed markings.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITION

A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and
relative humidity have been stabilized.

P a g e | 1 of 3
 Section 08 14 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD DOORS (Verify Design and Location)

1. Swing-in/out Marine Flush Door.
2. Swing-in/out Wooden Flush Door.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturer:
1. Wood Door and HDF Molded Door – as approved by the authorized person on
the site.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements:
1. In sizes indicated for jobsite fitting.
2. Factory pre-fit doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with uniform
clearances and bevels as indicated below:
a. Fitting Clearances for Non-rated Doors: Provide 3 mm at jambs and
heads; 1.50 mm per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 3 mm
from bottom of door to stop decorative floor finish or covering. Where
threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 6 mm clearance from bottom of
door to top of threshold.
b. Bevel non-rated doors 3 mm in 50 mm at lock and hinge edges.
B. Factory pre-machine panel wood for hardware; comply with finish hardware, door
frame shop drawings and hardware templates.

2.4 SHOP SEALING

A. Doors for Field Applied Transparent Finish: Shop seal faces and edges of doors with pre-
treatments acceptable to finish painting requirement.
1. Division-9 Section 09 91 00 “Painting”.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging doors:
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and the installed plumb jambs and level heads. Reject
doors with defects.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Flush, Panel and Molded doors shall be leveled, hung plumbed, and fitted
accurately allowing 2 mm clearance at the jambs and heads. Lock stiles of doors, 45 mm
thick or thicker, shall be beveled 3 mm in 50 mm. Knob locks and latches shall be

P a g e | 2 of 3
 Section 08 14 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

installed 1m from finished floors to the center knobs. Apply hardware with fastenings of
the size, quality and finish to provide a workable doors system.
B. Hardware: For installation see Division-8 “Door Hardware” section of these
specifications.
C. Install panel wood doors to comply with manufacturer’s instructions, applicable
requirements of referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
D. Pre-fit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION

A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Protect doors as recommended by the manufacturer to ensure that doors are without
damage at time of Substantial Completion.

- END OF SECTION 08 14 00 –

P a g e | 3 of 3
 Section 08 42 43
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 08 42 43
Intensive Care Unit/Critical Care Unit (ICU/CCU)
Entrances
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes manually operated ICU/CCU entrances.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For ICU/CCU entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of ICU/CCU entrances that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period: 15 years from the date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable product by one of the following:
1. As approved by the authorized person on the site.

P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 08 42 43
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
B. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
C. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout
complying with ASTM C 1107; of consistency suitable for the application.
D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.3 ICU/CCU ENTRANCE ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-glazed ICU/CCU entrances including
door leaves, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, and accessories
required for a complete installation.
B. Opening-Force Requirement, Sliding: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open the
door.
C. ICU/CCU Entrance
1. Configuration: Single-sliding two-panel door, with one operable leaf and
sidelite; with breakaway capability as indicated on Drawings.
2. Configuration: Single-sliding three-panel door, with one operable leaf and two
sidelites; with breakaway capability as indicated on Drawings.
3. Configuration: Bi-parting-sliding four-panel door, with one operable leaf and
sidelite on each side; with breakaway capability as indicated on Drawings.
4. Mounting: Between jambs.
5. Floor Track Configuration: No track across sliding-door opening and at sidelites
Trackless
6. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), sidelite(s), and header with high-performance
organic finish (two-coat fluoropolymer)
a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and
color densities

2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, with the minimum of
0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Nominal Size: 1 ¾ by 6 inches (45 by 150 mm).
2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) wall
thickness.
B. Stile and Rail Doors: Manufacturer's standard 1¾ inch (45 mm) thick glazed doors with
minimum 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members.
Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate
concealed tie rods that span full length of top and bottom rails.
1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and
preformed gaskets for glazing indicated.
2. Stile Design: Wide stile; more than 4 inch (100 mm) nominal width.
P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 08 42 43
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3. Rail Design: 5 inch (125 mm) nominal height.

4. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stile
design.
C. Sidelites: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) deep sidelites with minimum
0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members
matching door design and finish.
1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail
door.
2. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each sidelite; match stile
design.
D. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
E. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum,
and extending full width of ICU/CCU entrance units to conceal carrier assemblies and
roller tracks. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment.
Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access.
1. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors over spans up to 14 feet (4.3 m)
without intermediate supports.
2. Provide sag rods for spans exceeding 14 feet (4.3 m).
F. Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard carrier
assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered, ball-
bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track or of ball-bearing-
center-steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered, continuous roller track.
G. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, non-staining,
non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by ICU/CCU entrance and
hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to
match door finish unless otherwise indicated.
B. Breakaway Hardware: Provide release hardware that allows indicated panels to swing
out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from sliding mode.
1. Maximum Force to Open Panel: 50 lbf (222 N).
2. Release Position: Sliding door fully open.
C. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, edge mortised, lever-extension type;
located at bottom of each swing-out sidelite.
D. Deadlocks: Manufacturer's standard, operated by exterior cylinder and interior thumb
turn.
1. Deadbolts: Laminated-steel hook, mortise type, BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
2. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, six-pin mortise type.
a. Keying: No master key system and key all cylinders alike.
E. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 08 42 43
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

F. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard, nylon brush sweep mounted to underside

of door bottom.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Factory fabricated ICU/CCU entrance components to designs, sizes, and
thicknesses indicated and to comply with the indicated standards.
B. Framing: Provide ICU/CCU entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication,
assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project
site.
C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to
support imposed loads and for installing hardware.
D. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type
of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."
E. Hardware: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible; remove only as
required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site.
Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.
1. Provide sliding weather stripping, mortised into the door, within the perimeter
of the sliding doors and breakaway sidelites.
F. Electrical Grounding: Fabricate ICU/CCU entrances to be internally grounded, complying
with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA
2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints
free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. Seal joints watertight.
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action
by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape
recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion
by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating.
B. Install ICU/CCU entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades
without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.
1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to the greatest
extent possible.
2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level
and true to the location with anchorage for permanent support.
3. Level recesses for recessed floor tracks using shrinkage-resistant grout.
P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 08 42 43
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

C. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

D. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for installing
sealants, fillers, and gaskets.
1. Set framing members, floor tracks, and flashings in a full sealant bed.
2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.
E. Grounding: Connect ICU/CCU-entrance, electrical grounding systems to building
grounding system as specified in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."
F. Adjust force to open swing panels.
G. Test grounding system for compliance with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.

- END OF SECTION 08 42 43 –

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 08 51 13
Aluminum Windows
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES (Verify Design and Location)

A. Fixed Glass Window.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC), and
Wood Windows and Glass Doors.
B. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across
the Specimen.
C. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
D. ASTM E 331 - Standard test method for water penetration of exterior windows,
skylights, doors, and curtain walls by uniform static air pressure difference.
E. ASTM F 588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of
Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact

1.3 DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Test Units
1. Air, water and structural test units shall conform to size and configuration
requirements specified by AAMA/NWWDA 101/ I.S. 2-97.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Show dimensions of aluminum windows, elevations, details of all
window sections, anchorage and installation details, hardware and interface with other
products.
D. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements.
E. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installations methods.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Show dimensions of aluminum windows, elevations, details of all
window sections, anchorage and installation details, hardware, and interface with other
products.
D. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.
E. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
F. Shop Drawings: Show dimensions of aluminum windows, elevations, details of all
window sections, anchorage and installation details, hardware, and interface with other
products.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 10 years’ experience producing aluminum
windows of the type specified.
B. Installer Qualifications: Use installers that are experienced and skilled in the installation
of aluminum windows of the type specified.
C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and
application workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by the authorized person on the site.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are
approved by the authorized person on the site.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and handle windows and other components in strict compliance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Protect units against damage from the elements, construction activities and other
hazards before, during, and after installation.

1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Ensure that locating templates and other information required for installation of
products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption
of construction progress.
B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent
interruption of construction progress.

P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within the
limits recommended by the manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. As approved by the authorized person on the site.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: 6063 T-5 alloy with minimum ultimate tensile strength of 22,000
psi.
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209; 5005 alloy, H15 or H34 temper.
C. Fasteners: Aluminum, stainless steel or other materials warranted by the manufacturer
to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware,
anchors and other components of the window units.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate and assemble units with joints only at intersection of
aluminum members with uniform hairline joints; rigidly secure, and seal in accordance
with manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Hardware shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around the
perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter
seal.
D. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline and
weatherproof where required.
E. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
F. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.
G. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware.
H. Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to the exterior.
Furnish internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
I. Assemble insect screen frame, miter and reinforce frame corners. Fit mesh taut into
frame and secure. Fit frame with four spring loaded steel pin retainers.
J. Weather-strip all operable units.

2.4 FINISHES
A. Shop finished aluminum window components as follows
1. Architectural Class I Anodic with electrostatically deposited color AA-M12-
C22- A44. Thickness to be 0.7 mil and shall conform to AAMA 611-98.

P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

a. Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard

colors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify that openings are dimensionally correct and within allowable tolerances.
C. Openings must be plumb, level, and clean.
D. Verify that the anchoring surface is in accordance with approved shop drawings.
E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify the Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Plumb and align window faces in a single plane for each wall plane.
C. Erect windows and materials square and true adequately anchored to maintain
positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal and building movement and
specified wind loads.
D. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weathertight installation at all joints and
intersections and opening perimeters. Wipe off excess material and leave all exposed
surfaces and joints clean and smooth.
E. Glass and glazing shall conform to and be set in accordance with the specifications and
drawings to provide a satisfactory, fully leak-free installation.
F. Install vapor barrier materials and insulation between window perimeter and adjoining
collateral materials and/or existing wall barriers to assure continuity (optional).
Aluminum shall be insulated from direct contact with steel, masonry concrete or non-
compatible materials by bituminous paint, zinc chromate primer or other suitable
insulating material.
G. Adjust units for proper operation.
H. Set members to provide a watertight construction.
I. After completion of window installation, windows shall be inspected, put into working
order and left clean, free of labels, dirt or other substances.

P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.4 CLEANING
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. After installation, remove all sealants, caulking, and other materials from all surfaces
including adjacent work.
C. Thoroughly clean window frames, casings, and glass using materials and methods
recommended by the window and glass manufacturer that do not cause defacement of
work.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

- END OF SECTION 08 51 13 –

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 08 53 13
Vinyl (PVC) Windows
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Vinyl windows, glazing, hardware. All windows of the types and sizes called for in this
specification shall be furnished with necessary hardware and miscellaneous equipment
as specified herein and shall be manufactured by Windows & Doors.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.
D. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.
E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
F. Section 08810 - Glass and Glazing.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association:
1. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association: American
Architectural Manufacturers Association: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101./I.S.2/A440-08
– Voluntary Standard for Aluminum and Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Wood
Windows and Glass Doors.
B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM C1036-11e1 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. This specification
covers the quality requirements of flat, transparent, clear, and tinted glass.
2. ASTM C1048-12 - Standard Specifications for Heat-Treated Glass - kind HS,
kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
3. ASTM E283-04(2012) - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air
Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under.
4. ASTM E330-02(2010) - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
5. ASTM E547-00(2009) - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
6. ASTM E2188-10 - Standard Test Method for Insulating Glass Unit
Performance.
7. ASTM E2189-10e1 - Standard Test Method for Testing Resistance to Fogging
insulated Glass.

P a g e | 1 of 8
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

8. ASTM E2068 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Operating Force of

Sliding Windows and Doors.
9. ASTM E987-88(2009) - Standard Test Methods for Deglazing Force of
Fenestration Products.
C. IGCC - Insulated Glass Certification Council
D. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council:
1. NFRC - 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U – Factors.
2. NFRC - 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain
Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence.
3. NFRC - 400 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Air Leakage
4. NFRC - 501 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Condensation
Resistance Values.
E. WDMA - Windows and Door Manufacturers Association:
1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101./I.S.2/A440 - Voluntary Standard for Aluminum and
Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Wood Windows and Doors.
F. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association:
1. SMA 1201R-2012- Specifications for Insect Screens for Windows, Sliding doors
and Swinging Doors.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Performance Class Designations:
1. R is commonly used in one and two-family dwellings.
2. LC is commonly used in low-rise and mid-rise multi-family dwellings and other
buildings where larger sizes and higher loading requirements are expected.
3. CW is commonly used in low-rise and mid-rise buildings where larger sizes,
higher loading requirements, limits on deflection, and heavy use are expected.
4. AW is commonly used in high-rise and mid-rise buildings to meet increased
loading requirements and limits on deflection, and in buildings where frequent
and extreme use of the fenestration products is expected.
B. Performance Grade (PG) Designations: Actual design pressure that is designated by a
number following the type and class designation in pounds force per square foot.
C. Minimum test size: The smallest size unit permitted for performance class (gateway test
size). Products must be tested at the minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum
test size to comply with requirements for performance class.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Air infiltration (air leakage) shall not exceed the following when tested at 1.57 psf when
tested in accordance with ASTM E283: 0.30 cfm per square foot of frame.
B. Water penetration resistance - There shall be no water penetration when tested at the
desired/ specified pressure in accordance with ASTM E547.

P a g e | 2 of 8
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

C. Structural load testing - Product shall meet the damaged and permanent deflection
pass/fail criteria as stated in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E330.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data on each product to be used in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.
C. Samples: Submit corner section in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include the glazing
system and two complete sets of color chips representing the manufacturer's full range
of available colors.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. A manufacturer capable of fabricating vinyl windows that meet or exceed
performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by
inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. An installer acceptable to the vinyl window manufacturer for installation of
units required for this Project.
C. Product Requirements:
1. Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S. 2-08, "North American Fenestration
Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass
Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials,
components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements
are indicated.
2. Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with
GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging in an upright position off the
ground in a clean, dry area until ready for installation. Not to be stored in containers
that exceeds 130 Fahrenheit degrees.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify vinyl window openings by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by the manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

P a g e | 3 of 8
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period:
1. One Year Warranty: Glass Stress Cracks.
a. See Superseal Windows and Doors Product Warranty for details and
exclusions.
2. Lifetime Limited Warranty: Non-Glass Components.
a. See Superseal Windows and Doors Product Warranty for details and
exclusions.
3. Lifetime Limited Warranty: Insulated Glass.
a. See Superseal Windows and Doors Product Warranty for details and
exclusions.
4. Limited Warranty: Exterior / Interior Factory Colored Paint Finish.
a. See Superseal Windows and Doors Product Warranty for details and
exclusions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Subject to compliance with requirements as approved by the authorized person on the
site.

2.2 APPLICATION/SCOPE
A. Single Slider:
1. Vinyl Builders’ Series Single Slider Windows as manufactured by Superseal
Windows and Doors.
a. Performance: Class R-PG20, standard product, maximum single size 71
½ inches (1816 mm) by 59 1/2 inches (1511 mm). Single units only.
2. Sweep Locks: Positive locking mechanism.
a. 1 lock for basic unit frame height of 28” and less.
b. 2 locks for basic unit frame height of 28” and larger.
3. Operation: Left/Fixed; Fixed/Right.
4. Operating sash bottom rollers.
5. Operating sash is exterior glazed. Top fixed lite is interior glazed.
6. Jamb width Standard: 1-1/4 inches (32mm). Measured from the back of the
nail fin to the inside of the frame.
7. Extension Jambs: 4-9/16 inches (116 mm).
a. Primed Pine.
b. Natural Pine Subject to compliance with requirements and as approved
by the Architect/Engineer.
8. Extension Jambs: 6-9/16 inches (166 mm).
a. Primed Pine.
b. Natural Pine.
9. Extension Jambs: Custom size.
P a g e | 4 of 8
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

10. Wood jamb extension shipped loose.

a. Applied, upon request.
11. Weatherproofing: Weatherstrip located on sashes and frame.
12. Interlocking sash at vertical meeting stile.
13. 50/50 Sash Split.
14. 2 Weep holes on exterior of frame at sill location.
15. Frame color: White.
16. Frame type:
a. Standard integral nailing finish.
b. Integral J-channel.
c. Integral brickmould.
d. No nailing finish.
B. Single Hung:
1. Vinyl Builders’ Series Single Hung Windows as manufactured by Superseal
Windows & Door.
a. Performance: Class R-PG35, standard product, maximum single size 41
½ inches (1054mm) by 71 1/2 inches (1816 mm).
b. Performance: Class R-PG25, standard product, maximum single/
mulled size 71 inches (1803mm) by 72 inches (1829 mm). Continuous
head and sill with impost mull. Qualifies 1-wide and 2-wide units only.
2. 1, 2, 3 Wide units available. Continuous head and sill on multi-wide units.
3. Fixed top sash with a tilt in bottom sash.
4. Sweep Locks: Positive locking mechanism.
a. 1 lock for basic unit frame width of 28” and less.
b. 2 locks for basic unit frame width of 28” and larger.
5. Operating sash is exterior glazed. Top fixed lite is interior glazed.
6. Jamb width Standard: 1-1/4 inches (32mm).Measured from the back of the
nail fin to the inside of the frame.
7. Extension Jambs: 4-9/16 inches (116 mm).
a. Primed Pine.
b. Natural Pine
8. Extension Jambs: 6-9/16 inches (166 mm).
a. Primed Pine.
b. Natural Pine.
9. Extension Jambs: Custom size.
10. Wood jamb extension shipped loose.
a. Applied, upon request.
11. Weatherproofing: Weatherstrip located on sashes and frame.
12. Interlocking sash at vertical meeting stile.
13. 50/50 Sash Split.
14. 2 Weep holes on exterior of frame at sill location.
15. Frame color: White.
P a g e | 5 of 8
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

16. Frame type:

a. Standard integral nailing finish.
b. Integral J-channel.
c. Integral brickmould.
d. No nailing finish.
C. Single Slider & Single Hung Fixed Picture:
1. Vinyl Builders’ Series Single Slider & Single Hung Picture Windows, as
manufactured by Superseal Windows and Doors.
a. Performance: Class CW-PG40, standard product, maximum single size
59 ½ inches (1511 mm) by 71 1/2 inches (1816 mm). Single units only.
2. Jamb width Standard: 1-1/4 inches (32mm). Measured from the back of the
nail fin to the inside of the frame.
3. Extension Jambs: 4-9/16 inches (116 mm).
a. Primed Pine.
b. Natural Pine.
4. Extension Jambs: 6-9/16 inches (166 mm).
a. Primed Pine.
b. Natural Pine.
5. Extension Jambs: Custom size.
6. Wood jamb extension shipped loose.
a. Applied, upon request.
7. Interior glazed.
8. Frame color: White.
a. Standard integral nailing fin.
b. Integral J-channel.
c. Integral brickmould.
d. No nailing fin.
D. Accessories:
1. 1/2 inch (13mm) Drywall return, White.
2. 5/8 inch (16mm) Drywall return, White.
3. 3/4 inch (19mm) Drywall return, White.
4. Direct mull coupler, White.
5. Drip cap, aluminum.
a. White
E. Insect Screen: Roll formed-aluminum members, mesh fabric.
1. Half screen.
2. Frame Color: White.
3. Fiberglass mesh:
a. Custom mesh.

P a g e | 6 of 8
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.3 GLAZING
A. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Comply with requirements of Section 08810 and with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101./I.S.2/A440.
1. Safety Glass: Provide tempered products complying with testing requirements
in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials.
a. Both Lites.
b. 1 lite interior only.
c. 1 lite exterior only.
B. Glass Type: Clear 3/4” thickness.
C. Glass Type: Low E Insulated. 3/4” thickness
Color: Clear (No Tint).
Color: Bronze.
Color: Grey.
Color: Green.
Color: Graylite #31
Color: Custom.
D. Glass Type: Clear Super Sun Blocker Low E.
E. Glass Type: Clear Super Sun Blocker W/IS15.
F. Glass Type: Clear Low E 366.
G. Grille Type: Within airspace of insulated glass units with Queen Anne / Prairie design
a. 5/8” Flat Grille in Air Space.
b. 11/16” Contour Grille in Air Space.
H. Grille Type: Within airspace of insulated glass units with Craftsman design.
a. 5/8” Flat Grille in Air Space.
b. 11/16” Contour Grille in Air Space.
I. Grille Type: Within airspace of insulated glass units with Ladder design.
a. 5/8” Flat Grille in Air Space.
b. 11/16” Contour Grille in Air Space.
J. Grille Type: Within airspace of insulated glass units with Rectangular design.
a. 5/8” Flat Grille in Air Space.
b. 11/16” Contour Grille in Air Space.
K. Grille Type: Within airspace of insulated glass units with custom design. Refer to
drawings.
a. 5/8” Flat Grille in Air Space.
b. 11/16” Contour Grille in Air Space.

2.4 CONSTRUCTION
A. Interior: Vinyl.
B. Exterior Surface: Vinyl.
C. Weatherproofing: Provide perimeter weather-strip on operable panels.

P a g e | 7 of 8
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.5 HARDWARE
A. Locking Hardware: Single hung sash lock. Surface Mounted locks with positive locking
mechanism.
B. Locking Hardware: Single slider sash lock. Surface Mounted locks with positive locking
mechanism.
C. Finish:
1. White. (Standard)

2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate vinyl windows in sizes indicated.
B. Fabricate vinyl windows that are re-glazable without dismantling sash or ventilator
framing.
C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and
ventilator, unless otherwise indicated

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify the
Architect/Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
C. Finished Windows: Replace windows that are damaged or do not comply with
requirements. Windows may be repaired or refinished if work complies with
requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

-END OF SECTION 08 53 13-

P a g e | 8 of 8
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 08 63 00
Metal-Framed Skylights
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes skylights with metal framing.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For metal-framed skylights. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-framed skylights indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed
by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product test reports.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation for installation of metal-framed skylights required for this
Project.
B. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1401, "Guide for
Structural Sealant Glazing," for joint design and quality-control procedures.
C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of metal-framed skylights that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 15 from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period.
Warranty does not include normal weathering.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

P a g e | 1 of 7
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
B. General: Metal-framed skylights shall withstand the effects of the following without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction:
1. Structural loads.
2. Thermal movements.
3. Movements of supporting structure.
4. Dimensional tolerances of support system and other adjacent construction.
5. Failure includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
c. Framing members transfer stresses, including those caused by thermal
and structural movements to glazing.
d. Glazing-to-glazing contact.
e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural
movements.
f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other
components.
g. Sealant failure.
C. Delegated Design: Design metal-framed skylights, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
D. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As per the National Building Code of the Philippines and National
Structural Code of the Philippines. Also refer to Structural General Notes.
2. Seismic Loads: As per the National Building Code of the Philippines and
National Structural Code of the Philippines.
E. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to [edge of glass in a direction
perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding L/175 of the glass edge length for
each individual glazing lite] [1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches
(4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans more than
13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m)] or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual
glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1 mm), whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to [L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm), whichever is smaller] [amount not exceeding that which reduces
glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces
edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed
components to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)].
P a g e | 2 of 7
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

F. Lateral Bracing of Framing Members: Compression flanges of flexural members are

laterally braced by cross members with minimum depth equal to 50 percent of flexural
member that is braced. Glazing does not provide lateral support.
G. Structural-Test Performance: Provide metal-framed skylights tested according to ASTM
E 330, as follows:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies
do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design
pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures,
structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members
exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10
seconds.
H. Air Infiltration: Provide metal-framed skylights with maximum air leakage through fixed
glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when
tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24
lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
I. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide metal-framed skylights that do not
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested
according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of
positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
J. Thermal Movements: Provide metal-framed skylights that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures. Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due
to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100
deg C), material surfaces.
K. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed without
failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and
compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.
L. Energy Performance: Provide metal-framed skylights with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures
indicated below:
1. U-value (W/m2K) : 4.72.
2. Shading coefficient: 0.81.
3. Internal reflectance: 8.
4. External reflectance: 8.
5. Light transmission: 84.
M. Glass Composition:
1. Clear laminated tempered glass: 12mm + 1.52mm PVB + 12mm.

P a g e | 3 of 7
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
B. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain
glazing.
1. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning skylight components.
D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, non-staining,
non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. At pressure caps, use ASTM A 193/A 193M stainless-steel screws.
2. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning
out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
3. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
4. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads.
E. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel
inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), galvanized
steel.
G. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, non-staining,
nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
H. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components not less
than 0.060 inch (1.524 mm) thick.
I. Framing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard.
J. Framing Sealants: As recommended by the manufacturer.
1. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of
250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method
24).
2. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing
and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
K. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic.

2.3 GLAZING
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing”
B. Spacers, Setting Blocks, and Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard.
P a g e | 4 of 7
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

D. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by the manufacturer.

1. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have VOC content as
indicated when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing
and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
3. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral-curing silicone formulation
compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically
formulated and tested for use as structural sealant, and approved by structural-
sealant manufacturer for use in metal-framed skylights indicated.
a. VOC Content: 100g/L or less.
b. Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range.
4. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G,
A, and O; neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant
and other components with which it comes in contact; and recommended in
writing by structural- and weatherseal-sealant and metal-framed skylight
manufacturers for this use.
a. VOC Content: 250g/L or less.
b. Color: Matching structural sealant.

2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum components before finishing.
B. Fabricate aluminum components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints,
condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within
skylight to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and
framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances.
C. Fabricate aluminum sill closures with weep holes and for installation as continuous
component.
D. Reinforce aluminum components as required to receive fastener threads.
E. Factory-Glazed, Metal-Framed Skylights:
1. Factory installs glazing to comply with requirements in Division 08 Section
"Glazing”.
2. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to structural-
sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and

P a g e | 5 of 7
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming
surfaces.
F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project
according to Shop Drawings.

2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color
coat and clear topcoat.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's full
range.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C
1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, material qualification procedures,
sealant testing, and fabrication reviews and checks.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of
burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar materials, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with protective coating or by installing non-
conductive spacers as recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose.
C. Install continuous aluminum sill closure with weatherproof expansion joints and locked
and sealed corners. Locate weep holes at rafters.
D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the skylight to exterior.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevations.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing”.
1. Structural-Sealant Glazing:
a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to
structural-sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure

P a g e | 6 of 7
 Section 08 51 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to,

cleaning and priming surfaces.
b. Install weatherseal-sealant according to Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants" and according to weatherseal-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind
weatherseal-sealant as recommended in writing by weatherseal-sealant
manufacturer.
G. Erection Tolerances: Install metal-framed skylights to comply with the following
maximum tolerances:
1. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) where
surfaces above in line, edge to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding
element separates aligned surfaces by less than 3 inches (76 mm); otherwise,
limit offset to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
2. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in
12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.7 m) but no greater than 1/2 inch (13 mm) over total
length.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, skylights
shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water
penetration.
B. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not
comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

-END OF SECTION 08 63 00-

P a g e | 7 of 7
 Section 08 71 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 08 71 00
Finish Hardware
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Sections Includes:
1. Mechanical door hardware for the following.
a. Swinging doors.

1.3 COORDINATION
A. Floor-Recessed Door Hardware: Coordinate layout and installation with floor
construction.
1. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete.
B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be
factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate
provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated
requirements.
C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with
Owner’s security consultant.
D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door
hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.
E. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to
existing construction where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field
verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening
conditions and to provide proper door operations.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of
individual components.
2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety
and security systems.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule.
P a g e | 1 of 10
 Section 08 71 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed ant that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and
approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is
available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner
about door hardware and keying.
1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project’s vicinity.
2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule.
3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware,
including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of
manufacturer’s standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this
Project.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware
delivered to Project Site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door
hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary
fasteners with each item or package.
C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door
hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or
breakage.
b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless
otherwise indicated below:
a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
c. Concealed Floor Closers: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.

P a g e | 2 of 10
 Section 08 71 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.
1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical
door hardware unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform
electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer/Supplier:
1. New Gold Bond Marketing Corp.
2. Hafele Phils.
3. Dexterton Corp.
4. Other acceptable supplier by the Architect.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where smoke-and draft-control door assemblies are
required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of assemblies tested
according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door
assemblies are required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of
assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 3 cu.m per minute/ sq. m at the
tested pressure differential of 75 Pa of water.
C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 67 N to release the latch.
Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
D. Accessibility Requirements:
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or
twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 22.2N.
2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 22.2N applied perpendicular to
door.
b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 22.2 applied parallel to door at latch.
c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds
not more than ½ inch (13mm) high.
4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90
degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees
from the latch.
5. Adjust spring hinges so that, from an open position 90 degrees, the door will
take at least 1.5 seconds to move to the closed position.

P a g e | 3 of 10
 Section 08 71 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.3 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and
door hardware schedule.
1. Door hardware is scheduled in on Drawings.

2.4 HINGES
A. Hinges: Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors
and hollow-metal frames.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled
fire doors, and as follows:
1. Bored Locks: Minimum ½ inch (13mm) latchbolt throw.
2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3.4 inch (19mm) latchbolt throw.
3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch (25mm).
C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70mm) unless otherwise indicated.
D. Lock Trim: 1. Description: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1/ Grade 2; Series 4000.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements.
F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or
brass parts; Series 1000.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements.
G. Interconnected Locks: BHMA A156.12; Grade 1/Grade 2.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
H. Roller Latches: BHMA A156.16; Grade 1; rolling plunger that engages socket or catch,
with adjustable roller projection,
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
I. Push-Pull Latches: Bored, BHMA A156.2/ Mortise, BHMA A156.13; with paddle handles
that retract latchbolt; capable of being mounted vertically or horizontally.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. 2. Grade 1/2.

2.6 AUXILIARY LOCKS

A. Bored Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36: Grade 1/Grade 2; with strike that suits frame.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements.
B. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36; Grade 1/Grade 2; with strike that suits frame.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
C. Narrow Stile Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36; Grade 1/Grade 2; with strike that suits
frame.

P a g e | 4 of 10
 Section 08 71 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

D. Push-Button Combination Locks: BHMA A156.36; cylindrical; Grade 1; lock opens by

entering a one- to five-digit code by pushing correct buttons in correct sequence;
automatically relocks when door is closed; with strike that suits frame.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.

2.7 ELECTRIC STRIKES

A. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31; Grade 1/ Grade 2; with faceplate to suit lock and frame.

2.8 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS

A. Exit Locks and Alarms: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1.

2.9 SURFACE BOLTS

A. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16.

2.10 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS

A. Manual Flush Bots: BHMA A156.16; minimum ¾ inch (19mm) throw, designed for
mortising into door edge.

2.11 AUTOMATIC AND SELF-LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS

A. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum ¾ inch (19mm)
throw; designed for mortising into door edge, include wear plates.

2.12 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS

A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A1563.

2.13 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel
silver. Provide cylinder from same manufacturer of locking devices.
B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1/ Grade 2 permanent cores; face
finished to match lockset.
1. Core Type: Removable.
C. High-Security Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.30; Grade 1/Grade 2/ permanent cores that
are removable; face finished to match lockset.
1. Type: M, mechanical.
D. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
E. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent
cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2.14 KEYING
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28,
appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock.

P a g e | 5 of 10
 Section 08 71 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. No Master Key System: Only change keys operate cylinders

a. Provide three cylinder change keys.
B. Keys: Nickel silver/ Brass
1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and
include the following notation:
a. Notation: “DO NOT DUPLICATE.” Information to be furnished by
Owner.

2.15 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8

2.16 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

B. Maximum Air Leakage: When tested according to ASTM E 283 with tested pressure
differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa), as follows:
1. Smoke-Rated Gasketing: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft (3 cu m per minute/ sq. m) of door
opening.
2. Gasketing on Single doors: 0.3 cfm/ sq. ft (3 cu. M. per minute/ sq. m.) of door
opening.
3. Gasketing on Double Doors: 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/ s per m) of
door opening.

2.17 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.

2.18 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE

A. Sliding Door Hardware: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails,
hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.

2.19 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050 inch (1.3mm) thick
stainless steel; with manufacturer’s standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.

2.20 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer’s Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer’s name or
trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rating
labels and as otherwise approved by the Architect.
1. Manufacturer’s identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by
forming method indicated, using manufacturer’s standard metal alloy, composition,

P a g e | 6 of 10
 Section 08 71 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of
specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screw. Provide screws that comply with
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum
fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to
match surface of door hardware unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is
closed except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use
through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed
unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where
through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves
for each through bolt.
2. Fire-Rated Applications:
a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:
i. Hinges mortised to doors or frames.
ii. Strike plates to frames.
iii. Closers to doors and frames.
b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is
provided:
i. Surface hinges to doors.
ii. Closers to doors and frames.
iii. Surface-mounted exit devices.
3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.
4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications
and elsewhere as indicated.
2.21 FINISHES
A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces
are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor
construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
P a g e | 7 of 10
 Section 08 71 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring
connections before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and
frames according to ANSI/ SDI A250.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers’ written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware unit at heights indicated on Drawings unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.
3. Wood Doors: DHI’s “Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors.”
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.
Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces
that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-
mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce
attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not
fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one
hinge for every 30 inches/ 750 mm of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless
other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are
provided.
D. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate
offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than one
intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for
every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height greater than 90 inches (2286 mm).
E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure buildings and areas during
construction period.
1. Replace construction Cores with permanent cores as directed by the Owner.
2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner to installation.
F. Key Control System:
1. Key Control Cabinet: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in the key
control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

P a g e | 8 of 10
 Section 08 71 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Key Lock Boxes: Install where indicated or approved by Architect to provide

controlled access for fire and medical emergency personnel.
3. Key Control System Software: Set up a multiple-index system based on final
keying schedule.
G. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of
sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealant.”
H. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in the
door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
I. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware.
J. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seals when doors are closed.
K. Door Bottoms: Apply to the bottom of the door, forming a seal with a threshold when
the door is closed.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each
door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be
adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with reference
accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements
and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to
close freely from an open position of 70 degrees and so that closing time
complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of the keeper to
properly engage lock bolts.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after the date of Substantial
Completion, Installer’s Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust
each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to
ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions for Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal
and replacement of door hardware.
P a g e | 9 of 10
 Section 08 71 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall

include six/nine/twelve/ insert number months’ full maintenance, repair or replacement
of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for
proper door and door hardware operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer’s
authorized replacement parts and supplies.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware.

- END OF SECTION 08 71 00 –

P a g e | 10 of 10
 Section 08 80 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 08 80 00
Glazing
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the following:
1. Glass.
2. Glazing materials and accessories for both factory and field glazed assemblies.

1.2 LABELS
A. Temporary Labels:
1. Provide a temporary label on each light of glass identifying manufacturer or
brand and glass type, quality and nominal thickness.
2. Temporary labels are to remain intact until glass is approved by Contracting
Officer Representative (COR).
B. Permanent Labels:
1. Locate in corner for each pane.
2. Label in accordance with ANSI Z97.1
a. Tempered Glass
b. Laminated glass or have a certificate for panes without permanent
label.
3. Bullet resistant glass or plastic assemblies:
a. Bullet resistant glass or plastic assemblies in accordance with UL 752
requirements for power rating specified.
b. Identify each security glazing permanently with glazing manufacturer’s
name, date of manufacture, product number, and DOS Code number
inconspicuously located in the lower corner on protective side and visible
after glazing is framed.
c. The “attack (threat) side” is to be identified in bold lettering on each
side of glazing with a removable label.
4. Fire rated glazing assemblies: Mark in accordance with IBC.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Glazing Unit Design: Design glass, including engineering analysis meeting requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction. Thicknesses listed are minimum. Coordinate thickness
with framing system manufacturers.
1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on construction documents.
2. Wind Design Data: As indicated on construction documents.
3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit
center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than structural

P a g e | 1 of 4
 Section 08 80 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

capacity of the glazing unit, the threshold at which frame engagement is no

longer safely assured, 19mm (0.75inch), whichever is less.
B. Building Enclosure Vapor Retarder and Air Barrier:
1. Utilize the inner pane of multiply pane sealed units for the continuity of the air
barrier and vapor retarder seal.
2. Maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed
assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Manufacturer’s Certificates
1. Certificates stating that fire-protection and fire-resistive glazing units meet
code requirements for fire-resistance-rate assembly and applicable safety glazing
requirements.
2. Certificate on solar heat gain coefficient when value is specified.
3. Certificate on “F” value when value is specified. 4. Certificate test reports
confirming compliance with specified bullet resistive rating.
B. Manufacturer Warranty.
C. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data:
1. Glass, each king required.
2. Elastic compound for metal sash glazing.
3. Putty, for wood sash glazing.
4. Glazing cushion.
5. Sealing Compound.
D. Samples: 1. Size: 305mm by 305mm (12inches by 12 inches)
E. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: Submit glazing sealant
manufacturer’s test report indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass
and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing
materials.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Delivery: Schedule delivery to coincide with glazing schedules so minimum handling of
crates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping
damage.
B. Storage: Store cases according to printed instructions on case, in areas least subject to
traffic or falling objects. Keep the storage area clean and dry.
C. Handling: Unpack cases following printed instructions on case. Stack individual windows
on edge leaned slightly against upright supports with separators between each. D.
Protect laminated security glazing units against face and edge damage during the entire
sequence of fabrication, handling, and delivery to installation location. Provide
protective covering on exposed faces of glazing plastics, and mark inside as “INTERIOR
FACE” OF “PROTECTED FACE”.

P a g e | 2 of 4
 Section 08 80 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Treat security glazing as fragile merchandise, and packaged and shipped in

export wood cases with width end in upright position and blocked together in a
mass. Storage and handling to comply with manufacturer’s directions and as
required to prevent edge damage or other damage to glazing resulting from
effects of moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun,
other environment conditions, and contact with chemical solvents.
2. Protect sealed-air-space insulation glazing units from exposure to abnormal
pressure changes, as could result from substantial changes in altitude during
delivery by air freight. Provide temporary breather tubes which do not nullify
applicable warranties on hermetic seals.
3. Temporary protections: The glass front and polycarbonate back of glazing are
to be temporarily protected with compatible, peelable, heat-resistant film which
will be peeled for inspections and re-applied and finally removed after doors and
windows are installed at destination. Since many adhesives will damage
polycarbonate, the film used on exposed polycarbonate surfaces is to be
approved and applied by manufacturer.
4. Edge protection: To cushion and protect glass clad, and polycarbonate edges
from contamination or foreign matter, the four (4) edges are to be sealed the
depth of glazing with continuous standard-thickness thermoplastic rubber are to
be used, with flanges extending into face sides of glazing.
5. Protect “Constant Temperature” units including every unit where glass sheet
is directly sealed with metal-tube type spaces bar to polycarbonate sheet, from
exposures to ambient temperatures outside the range of 16 to 24 degrees C (60
to 75 degrees F), during the fabricating, handling, shipping, storing, installation,
and subsequent protection of glazing.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Field Measurements: Field measure openings before ordering tempered glass products
to assure for proper fit of field measured products.

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.1 PRODUCTS (Verify Design and Location)

1. Door : 10 mm thick Clear Tempered Glass
2. Door and Window : 8 mm thick Clear Tempered Glass with Colored
Glazing (Protective Film)

2.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide minimum thickness stated and as additionally required to meet performance
requirements.
1. Provide minimum 6mm (1/4 inch) thick glass units unless otherwise indicated.
B. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864:
P a g e | 3 of 4
 Section 08 80 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Silicone type.
2. Channel shape; having 6mm (1/4 inch).
3. Shore a hardness of 80 to 90 Durometer.
4. Block lengths: 50mm (2 inches) except 100 to 150 mm (4 to 6 inches) for
insulating glass.
5. Block width: Approximately 1.6mm (1/16 inch) less than the full width of the
rabbet.
6. Block thickness: Minimum 4.8mm (3/16 inch). Thickness sized for rabbet
depth as required.
C. Spacers: ASTM C864
1. Channel shape having a 6mm (1/4 inch) internal depth.
2. Flanges not less 2.4mm (3/32 inch) thick and web 3mm (1/8 inch) thick.
3. Lengths: 25 to 76mm (1 to 3 inches).
4. Shore A hardness of 40 to 50 to Durometer.
D. Glazing Tapes:
1. Semi-solid polymeric based closed cell material exhibiting pressure-sensitive
adhesion and withstanding exposure to sunlight, moisture, heat, cold, and aging.
2. Shape, size and degree of softness and strength suitable for use in glazing
application to prevent water infiltration.
3. Complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
a. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the
primary sealant.
b. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in
combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.
E. Spring Steel Spacer: Galvanized steel wire or strip designed to position glazing in channel
or rabbeted sash with stops.
F. Glazing Clips: Galvanized steel spring wire designed to hold glass in position in rabbeted
sash without stops.
G. Glazing Points (Sprigs):

- END OF SECTION 08 80 00 –

P a g e | 4 of 4
 Section 08 81 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 08 81 13
Decorative Glass Glazing
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass with solar-control film overlay.
2. Glass with safety and security film overlay.

1.3 DEFINITION
A. Glass Thickness: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters in accordance with
ASTM C 1036.

1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum
edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer’s personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after
installation.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer’s personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after
installation.

P a g e | 1 of 9
 Section 08 81 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For decorative glass. Show fabrication and installation details. Include
the following:
1. Size and location of penetrations.
2. Glazing method.
3. Mounting method.
4. Attachments to other work.
5. Full-size details of edge-finished profiles.
C. Glass Samples: For the following products, 300mm square:
1. Each solar-control film overlay on type of decorative glass.
2. Each safety and security film overlay on type of decorative glass.
D. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants, in 300mm lengths. Install sealant samples
between two strips of material representative of the glazed system.
E. Decorative Glazing Schedule: List decorative glass types and thicknesses for each size
opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For decorative glass indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installers.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of decorative glass.
C. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For each type of decorative glass and each solar-control and safety
and security film overlay and each applied coating to include in maintenance manuals.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:
1. A film installer trained and certified by a solar-control film manufacturer.
2. A qualified glass installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are
certified under NGA’s Certified Glass Installer Program.
B. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified in
accordance with ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to
demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by the authorized person on the site.

P a g e | 2 of 9
 Section 08 81 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become

part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.10 PRE-CONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass with decorative film
overlay, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion
to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of
current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
2. Use ASTM C 10987 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-
preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of
glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
3. Test no fewer than eight samples of each type of material, including joint
substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous
materials.
4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the
Work.
5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer’s written instructions
for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect decorative glass and glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer’s
written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation,
temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
B. Retain packaging and sequencing numbers for decorative-glass units.

1.12 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install decorative glass until spaces are
enclosed and weather tight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity
conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings and construction contiguous
with decorative glass by field measurements before fabrication.

1.13 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass
units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass
is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass
breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer’s
written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially
obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced
laminated-glass standard.

P a g e | 3 of 9
 Section 08 81 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Glass Film Overlay: Manufacturer agrees to replace film overlay on
glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of film
overlay is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to
damage or to maintaining and cleaning film-overlay contrary to manufacturer’s written
instructions. Defects include bubbling, corrosion, crazing, delaminating, and peeling
when properly installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions on
interior surfaces of glass windows.
1. Warranty Period – Solar Film Overlay: 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Warranty Period – Safety and Security Film Overlay: 10 years from date of
Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements and as approved by the authorized person on
the site
B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain each type of decorative glass from a single source of
manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from a single source of manufacturer,
for each product and installation method.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal
movement and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass
breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or
installation; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40
00 “Quality Requirements,” to design decorative glass.
C. Structural Performance: Decorative glass installed adjacent to walking surfaces shall
withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Differential deflection of adjacent unsupported edges shall not exceed glass
thickness when subjected to 730N/m applied horizontally to one panel at any
point up to 1067mm above the adjacent walking surface.
2. Base design on thickness at the thinnest part of the glass.
D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16
CFR 1201, Category II. Subject to compliance with requirements and as approved by the
Architect/Engineer.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers, “GANA’s “Glazing Manual” unless more stringent requirements are

P a g e | 4 of 9
 Section 08 81 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section
or in referenced standards.
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer’s
name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
C. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass liters in
thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
D. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-
strengthened float glass, or full tempered float glass as needed to comply with
requirements indicated. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide heat-
strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with
requirements indicated. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide fully tempered
float glass.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.
B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3, and with visible light
transmission not less than 91 percent.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and as approved by
the Architect/ Engineer.
C. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.
D. Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated)
unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-
Q3.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave
distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Heat-Strengthened Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition
A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as
indicated, Quality-Q3.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave
distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, For
3; finish, pattern, and quality as indicated.
G. Tempered Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully-tempered), Type II, Class 1
(clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Form 3; finish, pattern, and quality as indicated.
H. Patterned Ultraclear Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 3, with visible
light transmission not less than 91 percent; finish, pattern, and quality as indicated.

P a g e | 5 of 9
 Section 08 81 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

I. Tempered Patterned Ultraclear Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II,
Class 1 (clear), Form 3, with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent; finish,
pattern and quality as indicated.
J. Ceramic-Coated Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2
(tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3; and complying with Specification No.95- 1-31 in
GANA’s “Engineering Standards Manual.”
K. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency
to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and
installation.
L. Decorative Film Overlay: Translucent, dimensionally stable, cast PVC film, with pressure-
sensitive, clear adhesive back for adhering to glass and releasable protective backing.
1. Manufacturer:
a. 3M.
b. Other approved equivalent by the Architect.
M. Solar-Control Film Overlay: Translucent, dimensionally stable, polyested film, with
pressure-sensitive, clear adhesive back for adhering to glass and releasable protective
backing.
1. Manufacturer:
a. 3M.
b. Other approved equivalent by the Architect.
N. Safety and Security Film Overlay: Translucent, dimensionally stable, polyester film with
pressure-sensitive, clear adhesive back for adhering to glass.
1. Manufacturer:
a. 3M.
b. Other approved equivalent by the Architect.

2.5 GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Glazing Sealants, Tapes, and Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08
80 00 “Glazing.”
1. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

2.6 DECORATIVE GLASS FABRICATION

A. Fabricate decorative glass and provide other glazing products in sizes required to glaze
openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface
conditions, and bite complying with product manufacturer’s written instructions and
with referenced glazing standard.
B. Edge Finishing: Finish edges smooth and polished, without chips, scratches, or warps.
1. Edge-Finished Glass Adhesive: Clear, non-yellowing, as recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Lite Treatment: Surface Cut as indicated on Drawings with smooth, uniform edge.
D. Solar-Control Film Overlay: Apply squarely aligned to glass edges, uniformly smooth, and
free from tears, air-bubbles, wrinkles, and rough edges, the back face of clean glass, in
P a g e | 6 of 9
 Section 08 81 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, including surface preparation and

application temperature limitations.
E. Safety and Security Film Overlay: Apply squarely aligned to glass edges, uniformly
smooth, and free from tears, air bubbles, wrinkles, and rough edges, the back face of
clean glass, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, including surface
preparation and application temperature limitations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine decorative-glass framing members, with Installer present, for compliance with
the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size,
squareness, and offsets at corners.
2. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
3. Effective sealing between joints of decorative-glass framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate orientations of outer surfaces as indicated on Drawings.
Label or mark units as needed so that surface orientation is readily identifiable. Do not
use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Set decorative-glass units in each series true in line with uniform orientation, pattern,
draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
B. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that each outer surface faces the direction
indicated on Drawings.
C. Set decorative glass in locations indicated on Drawings. Install glass with hardware and
accessories in accordance with hardware manufacturer’s written instructions. Attach
hardware securely to mounting surfaces and building structure.

3.4 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Decorative Glass: Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 “Glazing.”
B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, gaskets, sealants,
tapes, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated,
including those in referenced glazing publications.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge

P a g e | 7 of 9
 Section 08 81 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with reference glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in this course
of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spaces for glass lites where length plus width is more than 1270mm.
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces
of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances,
unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to
maintain required face clearances, and to comply with system performances
requirements.
2. Provide 3mm minimum bite of spaces on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in
accordance with requirements in referenced glazing publications.

3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,
between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent
sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure.
Secure spacers or spacers and backing in place and in position to control depth of
installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels and between glass-to-glass joints to eliminate voids
and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool
exposed surfaces of sealants smooth.

3.6 SOLAR CONTROL AND SAFETY AND SECURITY FILM APPLICATION

A. Install film in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Install film without gaps or overlaps.
C. If seamed, do not overlap film.
D. Do not remove release liner from film until just before each piece of film is cut and
ready for installation.
E. Custom cut film to glass with square corners and edges within 3mm of window frame.
F. Remove air bubbles, blisters, and other defects including “fingers.”

P a g e | 8 of 9
 Section 08 81 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact
with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass
manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended
in writing by glass manufacturer

-END OF SECTION 08 81 13-

P a g e | 9 of 9
 Section 08 90 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 08 90 00
Louvers and Vents
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
This section includes:
1. Metal Louver Window.

1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. Drawings shall indicate materials, sizes,
fastenings and profiles. Materials shall not be delivered to the job site until shop
drawings have been approved.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect plastic ceiling vent slats during transit, delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
1. Exhaust Vent Grilles: Edilplast or approved equal
a. 155mm ø slanted Ventilation Grilles, with 100mm diameter standard
PVC exhaust pipe. For Toilets, Exhaust of STP, Fresh Air Intake and
Exhaust at Basement
b. 155mm ø slanted Ventilation Grilles, with 100mm diameter spiral pipe.
For Range hood exhaust pipe.
2. Steel Louvers
a. Steel louvers shall be fabricated from galvanized steel sheets to types,
shapes
and sizes, as indicated. The blades shall be gauge 14 and the frames shall
not be less than gauge 1. Blades shall be accurately fitted and firmly
secured to the frames. The edges of all louver blades shall be folded or
beaded for rigidity and weatherproofing.
b. Shop finish on steel members. Members shall be hot-dipped
galvanized, phosphate treated and epoxy shop-primed. Top coating finish
shall be spray applied using two component polyurethane paint. Color as
approved.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS:
1. Metal Louvers
Subject to compliance approved by the authorized person on site.

P a g e | 1 of 3
 Section 08 90 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard fabrication that is reglazable without
disassembling sash frame, unless more specific requirements are indicated. Include a
complete system for component assembly and window unit anchorage.
B. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for window units and profile requirements are
indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated along with maximum and
minimum dimensions as required.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening is
correct and the sill plate is level.
B. Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand and other
construction debris
C. Metal surfaces shall be dry, clean, free of grease, oil, dirt, rust and corrosion, and
welding slag, without sharp edges or offsets at joints.

3.2 INSTALLATION: VENT GRILLES

A. Install plastic ceiling in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Use a rubber ring adapter by installing together with the grilles.

3.3 INSTALLATION: STEEL LOUVERS

A. Install window units, hardware, operators, and other components of the work.
B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide
proper support and anchor securely in place.
C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound or with joint fillers or
gaskets, as shown. Refer to the "Joint Sealant" sections of Division-7 for compounds,
fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with window units. Coordinate
installation with wall flashings and other components of the work.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean ceiling-soffit on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
B. Clean steel surfaces promptly after installation of windows. Exercise care to avoid
damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant
compounds, dirt and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner that ensures that ceiling
soffit will remain without damage at time of Substantial Completion.

P a g e | 2 of 3
 Section 08 90 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through the remainder
of the construction period, to ensure that, except for normal weathering, window units
will be free of damage or deterioration at the time of substantial completion.

- END OF SECTION 08 90 00 –

P a g e | 3 of 3
 Section 09 24 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 09 24 00
Cement Plastering
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Division-
1 Specifications Sections shall apply to work of this section.
B. Section 09 91 00 – Painting.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of plain cement plaster work is shown on the drawings and in schedules.
1. Interior CHB walls.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Field Constructed Mock-Up: Fabricate mock-up panels for each type of finish and
application required using materials, indicated for final work. Produce sample 2.40m x
2.40m (8’ x 8’) full thickness in location indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as
directed by the authorized person on site. Demonstrate the proposed range of texture,
and workmanship to be expected in completed work. Panel's visual quality must be
approved by the authorized person on site before start of plain cement plaster work.
Retain panel during construction as a standard for judging completed work.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for Portland cement plaster from a single
source for each type of material required to ensure consistency in quality of
performance and appearance.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product specifications and installation instructions
for each product, including data showing compliance with requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Deliver cementitious materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand
name and identification of manufacturer.
B. Store materials properly to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight,
surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and
other causes.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling which might result
from plastering operations. Provide temporary covering and whatever other provisions
may be necessary to prevent harmful spattering of plaster on other work.

P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 09 24 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Warm Weather Requirements: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive

evaporation and from strong flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure
plaster. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or
combinations of these, as required.
C. Ventilation Requirements: Provide natural or mechanical means of ventilation to
properly dry interior spaces after Portland cement plaster has been cured.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT, PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Base Coat and Finish Coat Cements: Type as indicated below.
1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, Gray.
B. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S, or special
hydrated lime for masonry purposes, ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 897.
D. Aggregate for Finish Coats: ASTM C 897, Natural Sand.
E. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Drinkable, free of substances capable of
affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath or accessories.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Acid Etch Solution: Muriatic acid (10% solution of commercial hydrochloric acid) mixed
one part to not less than 6 not more than 10 parts of water.
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932.

2.3 LATH
A. Expanded Metal Lath: Fabricate expanded metal lath from uncoated or zinc-coated
(galvanized) steel sheet to produce lath that complies with ASTM C 847 for type,
configuration, and other characteristics indicated below, with uncoated steel sheet
painted after fabrication into lath.
1. Diamond Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd.
B. Latch Attachment Devices: Devices of material and type required by referenced
standards and recommended by lath manufacturer for secure attachment of lath to
framing members and of lath to lath.
1. Provide resilient clips for attachment of gypsum lath to steel at locations
indicated.

2.4 PLASTER ACCESSORIES FOR PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063; coordinate depth of
accessories with thicknesses and number of coats required.
B. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded large-mesh diamond mesh lath fabricated from
zinc-alloy or welded wire mesh fabricated from 0.0475-inch diameter zinc-coated

P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 09 24 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

(galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corners of Portland cement
plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement.
C. Metal Corner Beads: Small nose corner beads fabricated from zinc alloy, with expanded
flanges of large-mesh diamond lath to allow full encasement by plaster.
D. Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with expanded flanges and removable protective
tape, of the following material:
1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
E. Control Joints: Prefabricated of material and type indicated below:
1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
2. One-Piece Type: Folded pair of non-perforated screeds in M-shaped
configuration, with expanded flanges.

2.5 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MIXES & COMPOSITIONS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for base and finish coat mixes.
B. Base Coat Mixes and Compositions: Use the following proportions as material for the
respective base coats. Adjust mix proportions below within limits specified to attain
workability.
1. Three-Coat Work Over Concrete Unit Masonry: Base coat as indicated below:
a. Scratch Coat: 1 part Portland cement, 0-3/4 parts lime, 2-1/2-4 parts
sand.
b. Brown Coat: 1 part Portland cement, 0-3/4 parts lime, 3-5 parts sand.
C. Job-Mixed Finish Coats: Proportion materials for finish coats are as follows: 1. 1 part
Portland cement, 3/4 - 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 parts sand.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING

A. Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of Portland cement plaster,
removing loose material and substances which might impair the work.
B. Etch concrete and masonry surfaces indicated for direct Portland cement plaster
application. Scrub with acid etches solution on previously-wetted surface, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water. Repeat the application if necessary to obtain adequate
suction and mechanical bond of plaster (where dash coat or bonding agent or additive is
not used).
C. Apply bonding agent on concrete and masonry surfaces indicated for direct Portland
cement plaster application, comply with manufacturer’s instructions for application.
D. Apply dash-coat on concrete surfaces indicated for direct Portland cement plaster
application. Moisture-cure and dash-coat for at least 24 hours after application before
plastering.
E. Install temporary grounds and screeds as necessary to ensure accurate rodding of
plaster to true surfaces; coordinate with scratch-coat work.

P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 09 24 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

F. Surface Conditioning: Immediately before plastering, dampen the surfaces of concrete

and masonry which are indicated for direct application of plaster, except where a
bonding agent has been applied. Experiment with moisture application to determine
degree of saturation which will result in optimum suction for plastering.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLASTER ACCESSORIES

A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision
and location of plaster accessories of type indicated, unless otherwise indicated. Miter
or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach
accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and alignment during
plastering.
B. Accessories for Portland Cement Plaster: Install accessories of type indicated at the
following locations:
1. External Corners: Install corner beads at external corners.
2. Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plaster work unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated,
at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by the
authorized person on site.
a. Where an expansion or control joint occurs in the surface of
construction directly behind plaster membrane.
b. Where in plastered surfaces of walls, distances between, and areas
within, control joints exceed, respectively, the following measurements:
i. 6.0m in either direction and 13.37sq.m. (144 sq. ft.)

3.3 PLASTER APPLICATION

A. Portland Cement Application Standard: Apply Portland cement plaster materials,
compositions, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926.
B. Sequence plaster application with the installation and protection of other work, so that
neither will be damaged by the installation of the other.
C. Do not use excessive water in the mixing and application of plaster materials.
D. Tolerances: Do not deviate more than 3.175 mm (1/8”) in 3.048 m (10’-0”) from a true
plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 3.048 m (10’-0”) straightedge placed
at any location on the surface.
E. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories which act
as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not terminated
at metal by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal before plaster sets and groove
finish coat at the junctures with metal.
F. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush with
corners square and true with plaster faces on exterior work.
G. Number of Coats: Apply Portland cement plaster, of composition indicated, to comply
with the following requirements:
P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 09 24 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Use three-coat work over the following plaster bases:

a. Concrete masonry.
b. Concrete, cast-in-place when surface condition complies with ASTM C
926 for plaster bonded direct to solid base.
H. Finish Coats: For applying finish coats:
1. Moist cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including
recommendations for time between coats and curing.
2. Provide smooth trowel finish.
I. Thickness of Plaster: Minimum thickness of plaster shall be 20mm from face of plaster
base. Thicker plaster requirement, more than 20 mm but less than 40mm shall be
provided with lath reinforcement. Thickness more than 40mm shall be provided with
welded wire fabric reinforcement, WWF 2 x 2/ W0.3 x W0.3 as per ASTM A 185 and
ASTM A 82.

3.4 CUTTING & PATCHING

A. Cut, patch, repair and pint-up Portland cement plaster. Repair cracks and indented
surfaces. Point-up finish plaster surfaces around items which are built into or penetrate
plaster surfaces. Repair or replace the work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check
cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar imperfections. Repair
or replace the work as necessary.

3.5 CLEANING & PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary covering. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows and
other surfaces which are not to be plastered. Repair surfaces which have been stained,
marred or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work is
completed, remove unused materials, containers, and equipment and plaster debris.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which
ensures plaster work being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.

- END OF SECTION 09 24 00 –

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 09 29 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 09 29 00
Gypsum Board
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Division-
1 Specifications Sections shall apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of each type of gypsum ceiling construction required is indicated on drawings.
B. This section includes the following types of gypsum board construction:
1. Gypsum board screw-attached to steel framing and furring members, where
indicated.
2. Steel framing and furring members to receive gypsum board.
3. All exposed edges, corners, and as indicated on drawings, of gypsum board
installations shall be provided with galvanized steel trims.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified.
B. Samples of the following:
1. 600 mm x 600 mm gypsum board mounting shown in joint treatment and
framing.
2. 300 mm long corner beads and other trims.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single
manufacturer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages or bundles bearing brand name and identification
of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store and protect materials against damage.
C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent sagging and damage to edges, ends and surfaces.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for
application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum
board manufacturer’s recommendation.
B. Ventilate building spaces and avoid drafts during dry or hot weather.

P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 09 29 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.7 MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with manufacturers and as approved by the

authorized person on site.

1.8 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED & FURRED CEILING

A. Provide components which comply with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, stud
anchor type, DYNA bolt or equal, stainless steel or other non-corrosive material. With
the capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 3 times that imposed by the
ceiling construction, as determined from testing as per ASTM E 488.
C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, galvanized finish, of size minimum 6mm diameter, with
capability to sustain without failure, a load equal to 3 times that imposed by the ceiling
construction.
D. Turnbuckle: Galvanized finish.
E. Angle-Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22.22mm (7/8 inch) wide, formed
from 1.61mm (0.0635 inch) thick galvanized steel sheet.
F. Channel: Cold-rolled steel, 1.52mm (0.0598 inch) minimum thickness of base (uncoated)
metal. Carrying Channels: 30mm deep, 215.46 kilograms (475 lbs.) per 304.8meters
(1000 ft.), unless otherwise indicated.
G. Steel Rigid Furring Channel: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth of 21mm or as otherwise
indicated, 0.45mm (0.0179 inch) thick minimum.
H. Provide other required framing of profiles and sizes as shown on drawings, in gauges
approved by the authorized person on site.

1.9 GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum board shall be of types indicated and in maximum lengths available to minimize
end-to-end joints.
B. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 630
1. Type : MR Type.
2. Edges : Recessed (tapered).
3. Thickness : 12mm thick for ceiling, painted.
4. Location : Refer to reflected ceiling plan

1.10 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Corner bead and edge trim for interior installations. Comply with ASTM C1047 and the
following:
1. Steel edge trim formed from galvanized steel, “J”-Bead unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Trim Accessories shall be compatible and acceptable to gypsum board
products and manufacturer.

P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 09 29 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. One piece control joint: Formed with perforated face flanges connected by v-shaped
slot, 6.35mm (1/4 inch) wide by approximately 11.11mm (7/16 inch) deep and covered
with removable tape, fabricated from the following materials.
1. Roll-formed zinc.
2. Extruded vinyl.
3. Either roll-formed zinc or extruded vinyl.
C. Extruded Aluminum Reveal Moldings, where indicated: Provide manufacturer’s standard
extruded aluminum edge trim of profile shown or referenced by the manufacturer’s
standard product designation, fabricated from aluminum alloy 6063 T5 complying with
ASTM B221, finished as follows:
1. Class 1 Clear Anodized finish: AA-C12C22A42 (chemically cleaned; chemical
etch medium matte; 0.7 mil minimum thick clear anodic coating.)

1.11 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Provide materials complying with ASTM C475, ASTM C 840. Joint treatment materials
shall be acceptable to gypsum board manufacturers.
B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Setting-Type Joint Compounds: Factory pre-packaged, job-mixed chemical hardening
powder products formulated for uses indicated.
1. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated for use as taping and
topping compounds, use formulation for each which develops greatest bond
strength and crack resistance and is compatible with other joint compounds
applied over it.
2. For pre-filling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended gypsum
board manufacturer for this purpose.
D. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory pre-packaged vinyl-based products complying
with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1. Ready-Mix Formulation: Factory pre-mixed product.
2. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over
fasteners and flanges of corner beads and edge trim.
3. Topping compound formulated for fill (second and third) coats.
4. All-purpose compound specifically formulated and manufactured for use as
both taping and finishing compound, and compatible with tape, substrate and
fasteners.

1.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum ceiling construction which comply with reference
standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board.
B. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002, Type “S” steel drill screws.

P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 09 29 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 2 EXECUTION

2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum ceiling construction attaches or abuts for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2.2 PREPARATION
A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation
of overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage
provisions have been installed to receive anchors in a manner that will develop their full
strength and at spacing require to support ceiling.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated, to other trades for
installation well in advance of time needed for coordination with other
construction.

2.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that
apply to framing installation.
B. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by
structural movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details shown on
drawings:
1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at
ceiling perimeters or penetration of structural elements.

2.4 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED & FURRED CEILINGS

A. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible,
otherwise connect to cast-in-concrete inserts or other anchorage devices or fasteners as
indicated.
1. Do not attach hangers to the underside of concrete slabs with powder-
actuated fasteners.
B. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduits
C. Keep hangers and braces 50mm clear of ducts, pipes and conduits.
D. Sway brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacing indicated but not
less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard.
1. Hanger Rods: 1.22m (4’-0”) on center, both ways.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1.22m (4’-0’) on center.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 406.4mm (16”) on center.

P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 09 29 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

F. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that
cross furring members of grid are level to within 3mm in 3.70m as measured both
lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.
G. Clip furring members to main runners and to other structural support as indicated.

2.5 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install gypsum board ceiling in a manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints
or avoid them entirely where possible.
C. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or
damp boards. Butt boards together for alight contact at edges and ends with not more
than 1.5875 mm (1/16 inch) open space between boards. Do not force it into place.
D. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.
Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered ends. Do not
place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different
studs on opposite sides of partitions.
E. Attach gypsum board to steel furring so that the leading edge or end of each board is
attached to the open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first.
F. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional
support at openings and cutouts.
G. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with reference gypsum board
application and finishing standard and manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.6 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION

A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum ceiling as follows:
1. On ceilings apply gypsum board to the greatest extent possible.
2. Install edge trim where indicated.
B. For single-layer fastening methods apply gypsum boards to supports with adhesive and
supplementary screws.

2.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide final and proper protection and maintain conditions to gypsum board.

- END OF SECTION 09 29 00 –

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 09 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 09 30 13
Ceramic Tiling
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Division-
1 Specifications Sections shall apply to work of this section.
B. Section 10 28 13 – Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories.
C. Section 22 44 00 – Plumbing Fixtures: For drain setting coordination.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of ceramic tile work is indicated on Drawings and Schedules.
B. This Section includes:
1. Ceramic tiles for indicated walls and floors.
2. Mortars and Grouts.
3. Tile Trims.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete technical product data for each type of product specified.
B. Shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of expansion,
contraction, control and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer’s color charts consisting
of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available for each type and composition of the indicated. Include samples of grout and
accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared on samples of size
and construction indicated, products involve color and texture variations in sets showing
full range of variations expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at
least 600mm square.
2. Full size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single
source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying progress of the work.
B. Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious
and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
C. Engage an experienced installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar
in material, design, quality of workmanship and extent to that indicated for Project.

P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 09 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

D. Before installing tile, erect mock-ups for each tile design to demonstrate aesthetic
effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-ups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for the final unit of work.
1. Locate mock-ups on site, in location as directed by the authorized person on
site.
a. Select a portion of walls (2 sides) 2.5m wide x full height at an interior
corner including floor transition.
b. Show sealed movement joints.
2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
3. Obtain approval of authorized persons on site mock-ups before the start of
the final unit of work.
4. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as
a standard for judging completed unit of work.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and
labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling
sealed tile packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, foreign matter, and other
causes.
C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite these precautions
coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces
before setting tile.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation.
B. Provide adequate mechanical ventilation for areas to be installed with tiles, particularly
rooms without windows.
C. Provide adequate lighting at work areas. Illumination level of 323 lumen/square meter
(30 foot candles).

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver to Owner extra tile units, equal to 2 percent of each ceramic tile installed.
Packaged it with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly
describing contents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements and as approved by the authorized person on
site.

P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 09 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated
for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface, textures,
patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provides specific products or materials
complying with the following requirements.
1. Provide selections made by the authorized person on site from the
manufacturer's full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for products
of type indicated.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Physical Properties
1. Floor Tiles:
a. Type : Homogeneous
b. Edges : Eased
c. Color : Refer to Architect’s Control Sample
2. Wall Tiles:
a. Type : Glazed.
b. Edges : Eased
c. Color : Refer to the Architect’s Control Sample.
3. Tile trim where required: Provide products by KUS or other approved equal by
the authorized person on site. Refer to drawings for profile requirements.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A
108.1 and as specified below:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type 1.
2. Sand: ASTM C 144.
3. Water: Potable.
4. Bond Coat: Latex Portland Cement mortar on cured bed.
a. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSi A 118.4, color as selected by the
authorized person on site, composition as follows:
i. Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part
or all of gauging water, added at jobsite with dry grout mixture,
with type of latex mix as follows: Acrylic resin.
5. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized WWF 2 x 2/ W0.3 x W0.3 as per ASTM A
185 and ASTM A 82.

2.5 GROUT
A. Epoxy Grout: two-component, water cleanable, non-sag high strength, chemical and
acid resistant and conforming to ANSI A118.3. Colors shall be as selected by the
authorized person on site.

P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 09 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.6 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and
manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or
additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing
containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of
uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or
waxy films and curing compounds.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and
mechanical units of works, and similar items located in or behind tile has been
completed before installing tile.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation
standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and
methods indicated.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with
TCA installation methods indicated.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a
complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint
alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so that plates, collars or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Layout tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile
cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown.

P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 09 30 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including
control contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not cut joints after installation of tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7
Section "Joint Sealers".
G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards: 1.
Dry-set, Non-Sanded Grout: ANSI A 108.6.

3.3 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHOD

A. Install tile to comply with requirements indicated:
1. Mortar: Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A 108.1.
2. Bond Coat: Latex-portland cement.
3. Grout: Dry-Set.
4. Installation Standard: TCA F111-99.

3.4 WALL AND BASE INSTALLATION METHOD

A. Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Mortar: Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A 108.1.
2. Bond Coat: Latex-portland cement.
3. Grout: Dry-Set.
4. Installation Standard: TCA W202-99.

3.5 CLEANING & PROTECTION

A. Clean all ceramic tile surfaces.
1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile
and grout manufacturer’s printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after
installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, vitreous plumbing fixtures from
effects of acid cleaning. Flush the surface with clean water before and after
cleaning. Protect plumbing system.
3. Remove temporary protective coating. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped,
broken, unbounded and otherwise defective tile work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions.
1. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tile floors for at least 7 days after grouting
is completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile
surfaces.

- END OF SECTION 09 30 13-

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 09 65 16
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 09 65 16
Resilient Sheet Flooring
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Vinyl sheet floor covering, with and without backing.
2. Rubber sheet floor covering, without backing.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations
of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets,
and cutouts.
C. Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-
mm) sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Floor Score Compliance: Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of Floor
Score Standard.
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
P a g e | 1 of 4
 Section 09 65 16
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.2 VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERING

A. Basis-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable
product.
B. Unbacked Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, [0.080 inch (2.0 mm)] thick.
C. Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering with Backing: ASTM F 1303. (Cushioned sheet for F-8)
1. Type (Binder Content): Type II, minimum binder content of 34 percent.
2. Wear-Layer Thickness: Grade 1.
3. Overall Thickness: As standard with manufacturer.
4. Interlayer Material: Foamed plastic.
5. Backing Class: Class C (foamed plastic).
D. Wearing Surface: Smooth for F-4, F-6, and F-7, Smooth with embedded abrasives for F-
5.
E. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.
F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by the authorized person on site from a full range of
industry colors.

2.3 RUBBER SHEET FLOOR COVERING

A. Basis-Design Product: Provide or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Tarkett Inc.
B. Unbacked Rubber Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1859.
1. Type: Type I (homogeneous rubber sheet.
2. Thickness: As standard with the manufacturer.
C. Hardness: Not less than required by ASTM F 1859.
D. Wearing Surface: Textured with Molded pattern.
1. Molded-Pattern Figure: Raised discs or raised squares.
E. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.
F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by the authorized person on site from a full range of
industry colors.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based
or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type for the floor covering and substrate conditions
indicated.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
C. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:
P a g e | 2 of 4
 Section 09 65 16
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Cove Strip: 1-inch (25-mm) radius provided or approved by manufacturer.

2. Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap or Tapered vinyl cap provided or
approved by manufacturer.
3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved
by the manufacturer.
D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by the
manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion
of floor coverings.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as
follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission
rate of 3 lbs of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m in 24
hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75
percent relative humidity level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges.
D. Do not install floor coverings until they are the same temperature as space where they
are to be installed.
1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately
before installation.

3.2 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION

A. Install floor coverings.
B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
P a g e | 3 of 4
 Section 09 65 16
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

C. Lay out floor coverings as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.
2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic
areas, at least 6 inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering
substrates.
3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.
D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other non-
permanent marking devices.
G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to
substrate.
H. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 4 inches (100 mm) up vertical surfaces.
Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at top
against cap strip.
1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean and protect the floor properly.
B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive and surface blemishes from floor covering
before applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply three (3) coats.
C. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.

-END OF SECTION 09 65 16-

P a g e | 4 of 4
 Section 09 65 36
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 09 65 36
Static-Control Resilient Flooring
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Conductive, solid vinyl floor tile

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Static-Dissipative Properties: Provide floor coverings with static-control properties
indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by an
independent testing and inspecting agency.
1. Electrical Resistance: Test per [ASTM F 150 with 100-V applied voltage] [ESD-
STM7.1].
a. Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000
megohms when test specimens are tested surface to ground.
b. Average no less than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000
megohms when installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground.
2. Static Generation: Less than [300] V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent
relative humidity with conductive footwear.
3. Static Decay: 5000 to 0 V in less than [0.25] seconds when tested per FED-
STD101C/4046.1.
B. Conductive Properties: Provide floor coverings with static-control properties indicated
as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by an
independent testing and inspecting agency.
1. Electrical Resistance: Test per [ASTM F 150 with 500-V applied voltage] [ESD-
STM7.1] [NFPA 99, Annex E] [UL 779].
a. Average greater than 25,000 ohms and less than 1 megohm when test
specimens and installed floor coverings are tested surface to surface
(point to point).
b. Average no less than 25,000 ohms with no single measurement less
than 10,000 ohms when installed floor coverings are tested surface to
ground.
2. Static Generation: Less than [100] V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent
relative humidity with conductive footwear.
3. Static Decay: 5000 to 0 V in less than [0.03] [0.01] seconds when tested per
FED-STD101C/4046.1.
C. FloorScore Compliance: Static-control resilient flooring shall comply with requirements
of FloorScore Standard.

P a g e | 1 of 6
 Section 09 65 36
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, edges,
columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
C. Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than [6-by-9-inch (152-by-230-
mm)] sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required.

1.4 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS

A. Product test reports.
B. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces
to receive floor coverings
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTIVE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS (F-7 of Schedule of Finishes)

A. Conductive, Solid Vinyl Floor Tile: ASTM F 1700, Class I (monolithic), Type A (smooth
surface).
1. Basic-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable product by Tarkett, Inc.

P a g e | 2 of 6
 Section 09 65 36
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Thickness: In manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.08 inch
(2.0 mm).
3. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
4. Colors and Patterns: As selected by the authorized person on site from full
range of industry colors.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B. Static-Control Adhesive: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type that maintains
electrical continuity of floor covering system to ground connection.
1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
C. Grounding Strips: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type and size that maintains
electrical continuity of floor covering system to ground connection.
D. Integral-Flash-Cove Base Accessories:
1. Cove Strip: 1-inch (25-mm) radius support strip provided or approved by
manufacturer.
2. Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by
manufacturer.
3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved
by floor covering manufacturer.
E. Maintenance Floor Tiles: Special floor tiles inscribed "Conductive floor. Do not wax."
F. Floor Polish: Provide protective, static-control liquid floor polish products as
recommended by floor covering manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions and with oversight
by the authorized person on site to ensure adhesion of floor coverings and electrical
continuity of floor covering systems.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
P a g e | 3 of 6
 Section 09 65 36
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using
mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as
follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission
rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24
hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent
relative humidity level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges.
D. Do not install floor coverings until they are the same temperature as space where they
are to be installed.
1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately
before installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install static-control resilient floor covering according to manufacturer's written
instructions and with oversight by the authorized person on site.
B. Embed grounding strips in static-control adhesive. Extend grounding strips beyond the
perimeter of static-control resilient floor covering surfaces to ground connections.
C. Scribe, cut, and fit floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door
frames.
D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
Extend floor covering to center of door openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other non-
permanent, non-staining marking device.
F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of static-control adhesive
applied to substrate.
G. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 6 inches (152 mm) up vertical surfaces.
Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top
against cap strip.
1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.
P a g e | 4 of 6
 Section 09 65 36
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so floor tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary
to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half floor tile at perimeter.
1. Lay floor tiles square with room axis.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting floor tiles from cartons in same
sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked,
chipped, or deformed floor tiles.
D. In each space where conductive, solid vinyl floor tile is installed, install maintenance
floor tile identifying conductive floor tile in location approved by the authorized person
on site.

3.4 SHEET FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing sheet floor coverings.
B. Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C. Lay out sheet floor coverings as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of sheet floor covering direction.
2. Minimize number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low-traffic
areas, at least 6 inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering
substrates.
3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test electrical resistance of static-control resilient floor covering systems.
1. Arrange for testing after installation static-control adhesives have fully cured
and floor covering systems have stabilized to ambient conditions and after
ground connections are completed.
2. Arrange for testing of floor coverings before and after performing floor polish
procedures.
3. Static-control resilient floor coverings will be considered defective if they do
not pass tests and inspections.
4. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor
coverings.
B. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period.

P a g e | 5 of 6
 Section 09 65 36
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Do not wax static-control resilient floor coverings.

2. If recommended in writing by the manufacturer, apply protective static-
control floor polish formulated to maintain or enhance floor covering's electrical
properties to floor covering surfaces that are free from soil, static-control
adhesive and surface blemishes.
a. Verify that both floor polish and its application method are approved
by the manufacturer and that floor polish will not leave an insulating film
that reduces floor coverings' effectiveness for static control.
C. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.

-END OF SECTION 09 65 36-

P a g e | 6 of 6
 Section 09 91 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 09 91 00
Painting

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and
exterior items and surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in
addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules", except
where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain
natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as
similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the authorized
person on site will select from standard colors or finishes available.
C. Painting is not required on pre-finished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed
surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
1. Pre-finished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished
components.
a. Pre-stained toilet doors.
b. Elevator entrance doors and frames.
c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
d. Light fixtures.
e. Distribution cabinets.
f. Finishing Hardware
g. Stone material.
h. PVC material.
2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the
following generally inaccessible areas:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Pipe spaces.
c. Duct shafts.
d. Elevator Shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include:
a. Finished Aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
c. Brass.
4. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other
code- required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or
nomenclature plates.
D. Related Sections
P a g e | 1 of 9
 Section 09 91 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.

2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames” for shop priming steel doors and
frames.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete manufacturer's technical data including label analysis, and application
instructions for each material proposed for use.
1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system
and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number
and general classification.
B. Samples for initial color selections in the form of manufacturer's color charts.
1. After color selection, the authorized person on site will furnish color chips for
surfaces to be coated.
C. Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Define each
separate coat, including block fillers (putty) and primers. Use representative colors
when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture
are achieved.
1. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label
each sample as to location and application.
2. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color
and texture only.
a. Concrete: Provide 203.2 mm square (8 inch-square) samples for each
color and finish.
b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 101.6mm x 203.2mm ( 4”x 8”) samples
of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color.
c. Painted Wood: Provide two 304.8mm x 304.8mm (12” x 12“) samples
of each color and material on hardboard.
d. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 101.6mm square (4-inch-square) samples
of flat metal and two 50.8 mm (8-inch-long) samples of solid metal for
each color and finish.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish
coats.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish
information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the authorized person on site of problems anticipated using the
materials specified.
C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate
finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 9.29 sq. m. (100
P a g e | 2 of 9
 Section 09 91 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

sq. ft.) of surface until required sheen, color and are obtained; simulate finished lighting
conditions for review of in-place work.
1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples.
2. The authorized person on site will select one room or surface to represent
surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted.
Apply coatings in this room or surface in accordance with the schedule or as
specified. After finishes are accepted, this room or surface will be used for
evaluation of coating systems of a similar nature.
D. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of
the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying
manufacturer’s product identification will not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to
imply that products named are required or to exclude equal products of other
manufacturers.
2. Federal Specifications: Establish a minimum quality level for paint materials,
except where other product identification is used. Provide written certification
from the manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed these criteria.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Federal Specification number, if applicable.
4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
6. Thinning instructions.
7. Application instructions.
8. Color name and number.
B. Place materials not in use in tightly covered containers and store in a neat and well
ventilated area. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.

1.5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, FIRE HAZARDS

A. Smoking is strictly prohibited in work premises and storage area and all other areas
where flammable, combustible, or similar hazardous materials are stored, in use, or in
the process of application. No smoking signs shall be posted in all prohibited areas.
B. All storage, handling, or use of flammable and combustible materials shall be under the
supervision of the authorized person on site.
C. Lighting shall be the only means used for artificial illumination in areas where flammable
materials are present.

P a g e | 3 of 9
 Section 09 91 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

D. Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided where needed and inspected and
maintained in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 10. Extinguishers shall be suitably
placed, distinctly marked, readily accessible, and maintained in a fully charged and
operable condition.
E. Masks and suitable clothing shall be worn by persons engaged in work using harmful
substances or producing irritants such as dust or fumes.
F. When persons are exposed to epoxy resins, hydrocarbons, solvents, or other dermatitis
producing substances, ointment recommended by the manufacturer for specific
exposure shall be available.
G. Workers shall not be allowed to cook or eat within the project work area.
H. Drop lines, lanyards and lifelines independently attached or attended shall be used
when performing such work on hazardous areas or other unguarded locations.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply paint in rain, or too damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed. Do not
begin paint application until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator’s acceptance of surfaces
and conditions within a particular area.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove hardware and accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection
prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete
painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations
in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.
1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and
grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other
contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted
surfaces.
B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

P a g e | 4 of 9
 Section 09 91 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.

Notify the authorized person on site in writing of problems anticipated with
using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others.
2. Cementitious Surfaces: Prepare and clean substrate to be painted. Roughen as
required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve
curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint
manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering
and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application. Do
not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in
manufacturer's printed directions.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces and sandpaper, as required to view smooth. Dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of
white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of
primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with
putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery.
Prime the edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
c. When transparent finish is required, back prime with spar varnish.
d. Back prime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or
other wet wall construction occurs on the backside.
e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy
coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean non-galvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not
been shop coated. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with
recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council.
a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been
damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents, and touch up with the same
primer as the shop coat.
b. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non-petroleum
based solvents. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
5. Cement boards
a. Before painting, remove the surface dirt, grime or other contaminants
with a soft brush.
b. Do not use water and ensure that cement boards are dry prior to
painting.
C. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
P a g e | 5 of 9
 Section 09 91 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir

as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film
and, if necessary, strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within
recommended limits.
D. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat
where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the
color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to
distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules," or if
not indicated, as directed by the authorized person on site.
2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
3. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has
cured. Sand the surface between applications where sanding is required to
produce an even smooth surface.
4. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show
through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and
appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges,
corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness
equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent built-in
fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar
components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain
the system’s integrity and provide desired protection.
6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar
exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment.
7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with
a flat, non-specular black paint.
8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to
match exterior.
10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior
faces.
P a g e | 6 of 9
 Section 09 91 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop- primed and touch up
painted.
C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do
not re-coat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or
feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another
coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to
items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
F. Mechanical items to be painted include but are not limited to:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
2. Tanks.
3. Supports.
G. Electrical items to be painted include but are not limited to:
1. Conduit and fittings.
2. Switch gear.
H. Putty: Apply putty to concrete and masonry surfaces at a rate to ensure complete
coverage with pores filled.
I. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as
recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished
and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where
evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat
with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film
of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color, irregularity, runs, brush
marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film
of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush
marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
L. Completed Work: Match approved samples of color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Owner reserves the right to involve the following test procedure at any time and as
often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to
sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the
P a g e | 7 of 9
 Section 09 91 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the
Contractor.
2. The testing laboratory will perform appropriate test for the following
characteristics as required by the Owner.
a. Quantitative materials analysis.
b. Abrasion resistance.
c. Apparent reflectivity.
d. Flexibility.
e. Washability.
f. Absorption.
g. Accelerated weathering.
h. Dry capacity.
i. Accelerated yellowness.
j. Recoating.
k. Skinning.
l. Color retention.
m. Alkali and mildew resistance.
3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified
requirement, the authorized person on site may be directed to stop painting,
remove non-complying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with
rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if,
upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are non-compatible.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other
discarded paint materials from the site.
B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces, using care not to
scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the
authorized person on site.
B. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary
protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion
of painting operations. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up
and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. General: Provide the following for the required exterior paint systems:
1. Masonry walls: Three (3) finish coats of semi-gloss acrylic solvent paint over
primer.
P a g e | 8 of 9
 Section 09 91 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

a. Primer: Solvent-based interior white primer (FS TT-P-650).

b. 1st, 2nd & 3rd Finish Coats: Semi-gloss acrylic solvent paint.
c. Color as selected by the Architect.
2. Fiber Cement Board: Ceiling eaves
a. 1st and 2nd Coats: Acrylic Latex paint.
b. 3rd Finish Coat: Acrylic Latex paint.

3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
Color as selected by the authorized person on site.
1. Rubbed Concrete, Masonry Walls and other areas where required: Two finish
coats of semi-gloss acrylic latex based paint over primer:
a. Primer: As per manufacturer's recommendation.
b. 1 and 2 Coats: Semi-gloss Acrylic latex paint.
st nd

2. Gypsum Boards (Ceilings): Two (2) finish coats of flat wall acrylic latex paint
over primer (PT-3):
a. Primer: Latex-based interior white primer (FS TT-P-650).
b. 1 and 2 Finish Coats: Flatwall acrylic latex paint.
st nd

3. Fiber Cement Board:

a. 1 and 2 Coats: Acrylic Latex paint.
st nd

4. Rubbed Concrete Ceiling Underslabs, Beams, Columns and other areas where
required: Two finish coats of flat wall acrylic latex paint over concrete sealer:
a. Sealer: As per manufacturer's recommendation.
b. 1 and 2 Coats: Flatwall acrylic latex paint.
st nd

5. Ferrous Metal: 2 coats full-gloss enamel finish over epoxy primer.

a. Primer: Epoxy metal primer.
b. 1 and 2 Coats: Full-gloss enamel paint.
st nd

6. Metal Doors and jambs : 2 coats gloss Quick drying enamel over epoxy
primer.
7. Flush Wood doors and jambs.
a. Sanding sealer.
b. First Coat: Oil wood stain.
c. Filler Coat: Sanding sealer.
d. Third Coat: Lacquer enamel gloss.

- END OF SECTION 09 91 00 –

P a g e | 9 of 9
 Section 10 21 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 10 21 13
Toilet Compartments
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Phenolic-core toilet compartments configured as Toilet Enclosures and Urinal
Screens.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C. Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1.3 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS

A. Product certificates.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the National Building
Code of the Philippines (BP 344) for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PHENOLIC-CORE UNITS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Willy’s by GCK International.
B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced and Floor anchored.
C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung.
D. Door, Panel, Urinal Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic-core panel material
with melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not
separately laminated), and with eased and polished edges and no-sightline system.
Provide minimum 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch-
(13-mm-) thick panels.
E. Pilaster [Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet, not less than
76mm high, finished matching hardware.
F. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel.
P a g e | 1 of 3
 Section 10 21 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless

steel.
G. Phenolic-Panel Finish: Facing sheet of one color and pattern.
1. Color and Pattern: As selected by the authorized person on site from
manufacturer's full range, with manufacturer's standard dark-color core.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating
hardware and accessories.
1. Material: Stainless steel.
2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted
to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard latch unit designed for emergency
access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units
that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments
designated as accessible.
4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped
bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted
accessories.
5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging
doors.
6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies
with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of
doors at compartments designated as accessible.
B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail
with anti-grip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel
finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide
sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports,
leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at
pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
B. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring
assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor.
Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
C. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring
assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural
support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure
without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters
to conceal anchorage.
P a g e | 2 of 3
 Section 10 21 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

D. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant

anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide
shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
E. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 610-mm - wide, in-swinging
doors for standard toilet compartments and 914-mm - wide, out-swinging doors with a
minimum 813m - wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units’ rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
B. Clearances: Maximum 13mm between pilasters and panels; 25mm between panels and
walls.
C. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three
brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets
so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with
brackets at walls.

3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware
manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging
doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when
unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors.

-END OF SECTION 10 21 13-

P a g e | 3 of 3
 Section 10 21 23
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 10 21 23
Cubicles
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Curtain tracks and carriers.
2. Intravenous (IV) tracks, carriers and bottle holders.
3. Curtains.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of cubicles, sizes of curtains, number of carriers, anchorage
details, and accessories.
C. Samples: For each type of curtain.
D. Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below:
1. Curtain Carriers and Track End Caps: Full-size units equal to 3 percent of
amount installed, but no fewer than 20 units.
2. Curtains: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer
than 10 units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Curtains: Provide curtain fabrics with the following characteristics:
1. Curtain Carriers and Track End Caps: Full-size units equal to 3 percent of
amount installed, but no fewer than 20 units.
2. Curtains: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer
than 10 units.

2.2 CURTAIN SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. Extruded-Aluminum Curtain Track: Not less than 1-1/4 inches wide by 3/4 inch high (32
mm wide by 19 mm high); with manufacturer's standard wall thickness.
1. Curved Track: Factory-fabricated, 12-inch- (305-mm-) radius bends.
2. Finish: Satin anodized.
P a g e | 1 of 3
 Section 10 21 23
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3. PVC Curtain Track: Not less than 1-1/4 inches wide by 15/16 inch high (32 mm
wide by 24 mm high).
4. Curved Track: Factory-fabricated, 12-inch- (305-mm-) radius bends.
B. Curtain Track Accessories: Fabricate from same material and with same finish as track.
C. Curtain Carriers: One-piece nylon glide with aluminum hook.
D. Breakaway Curtain Carriers: One-piece nylon breakaway curtain carriers designed to
allow curtains to detach from tracks with a pulling force of no more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).
E. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel
F. Concealed Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized

2.3 CURTAINS
A. Cubicle Curtain Fabric: Curtain manufacturer's standard, 100 percent polyester,
inherently and permanently flame resistant, stain resistant, and antimicrobial.
1. Color: As selected by the authorized person on site from manufacturer's full
range.
B. Shower Curtain Fabric: Curtain manufacturer's standard, polyester-reinforced vinyl
fabric; flame resistant, stain resistant, and antimicrobial.
1. Color: As selected by the authorized person on site from manufacturer's full
range
C. Curtain Grommets: Nickel-plated brass; spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) o.c.;
machined into top hem.
D. Mesh Top: Not less than 20-inch- (508-mm-) high mesh top of nylon mesh.
E. Beaded-Chain Curtain Drop: 6 inches (152 mm) long; nickel-plated steel with aluminum
hook.
F. PVC-Strip Curtain Drop: 16 inches (406 mm) long with chrome-plated steel hook.
G. Curtain Tieback: Nickel-plated brass chain; one at each curtain termination.
H. Fabricate curtains as follows:
1. Width: Equal to track length from which curtain is hung plus 10 percent added
fullness, but not less than 12 inches (305 mm) added fullness.
2. Length: Equal to floor-to-ceiling height, minus depth of track and carrier at
top, and minus clearance above the finished floor as follows:
a. Cubicle Curtains: 12 inches (305 mm).
b. Dressing-Area Curtains: 4 inches (102 mm).
c. Tub Curtains: 6 inches (152 mm).
d. Shower Curtains: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
I. Vertical Seams: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, double turned and double
stitched.

2.4 IV SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. IV Tracks: Extruded aluminum, not less than 1-1/4 inches wide by 3/4 inch high (32 mm
wide by 19 mm high); with manufacturer's standard wall thickness.
1. Curved Track: Factory-fabricated, 12-inch- (305-mm-) radius bends.
P a g e | 2 of 3
 Section 10 21 23
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Finish: Satin anodized.

3. IV Carriers: Four nylon rollers and stainless-steel axles with ball bearings and
with hanger loop fabricated from 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter stainless steel.
B. Stationary IV Bottle Holders: 24-inch (610-mm) fixed height with stainless-steel shaft;
with four non-folding 1/4-inch (6-mm) stainless-steel arms with loops, a stainless-steel
bottom loop, and a stainless-steel top loop to attach to carrier.
1. Top Loop: Coated for non-conductivity

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install tracks level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instruction.
B. Up to 20 feet (6.0 m) in length, provide track fabricated from single continuous length.
1. Curtain Track Mounting: Surface, Suspended, or as indicated on Drawings.
2. IV Track Mounting: Surface.
C. Surface-Track Mounting: Fasten tracks to ceilings at intervals. Fasten tracks to structure
at each splice and tangent point of each corner. Center fastener in track to ensure
unencumbered carrier operation.
D. Suspended-Track Mounting: Install track with manufacturer's standard tubular
aluminum suspended supports at intervals and with fasteners. Fasten supports to
structure. Provide supports at each splice and tangent point of each corner. Secure ends
of track to wall with flanged fittings or brackets.
E. Track Accessories: Install splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and joining
sleeves, and other accessories as required for a secure and operational installation.
F. IV Bottle Holders: Unless otherwise indicated, install one IV hook on each IV track and
hang one IV hanger.
G. Curtain Carriers: Provide curtain carriers adequate for 6-inch (152-mm) spacing along
full length of curtain plus an additional carrier.
H. Curtains: Hang curtains on each curtain track. Secure with curtain tieback

-END OF SECTION 10 21 13-

P a g e | 3 of 3
 Section 10 28 23
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 10 28 13
Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Supplementary Conditions apply
to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on drawings and schedules.
B. Types of toilet accessories required include the following:
1. Soap Holder.
2. Tissue Holder.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in
concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid
interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each toilet
accessory.
B. Submit full-size samples of units to Architect for review of design and operation.
Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work.
C. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorage devices and cut-out requirements in other work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Steel: AISI Type 304, with satin finish, 22 gage (.034") minimum, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366, 20-gage (.040") minimum,
unless otherwise indicated. Surface preparation and metal pre-treatment.
C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of
galvanized steel where concealed.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Only an unobtrusive stamped logo of manufacturer, as approved by the
authorized person on site, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units.
On either interior surface not exposed to view of back surface, provide additional
P a g e | 1 of 2
 Section 10 28 23
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

identification by means of either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate,

indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated,
fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access
panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage
wherever possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Provide anchorage which is fully concealed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using
fasteners which are appropriate to substrate. Install units plumb and level, firmly
anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function
smoothly. Replace damage or defective items.
B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels and protective
coatings.

- END OF SECTION 10 28 13 –

P a g e | 2 of 2
 Section 12 32 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 12 32 00
Manufactured Casework
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-faced wood cabinets of stock design.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
3. Solid-Surfacing materials.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
C. Samples: For cabinet finishes and for each type of top material indicated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of
custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish material of
manufactured wood casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog
numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes and door and drawer
configurations, of same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may be
considered. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of manufactured wood casework that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond.
b. Warping of components.
c. Failure of operating hardware.
d. Deterioration of finishes.
2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 12 32 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate manufactured wood casework, including countertops,
with adhesives and composite wood products containing no urea formaldehyde.
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives and composite wood products shall comply with the
testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources
Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for
softwood.
D. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, either veneer core or particleboard core unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
F. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
G. MDF: ANSI A208.2, [Grade 130].
H. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.
I. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
J. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally fused,
melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
K. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Plastic laminate matching adjacent surfaces.
L. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 satin finish.
M. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
ISSFA-2.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable product by one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Samsung; Cheil Industries Inc.
c. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
d. Avonite.

2.2 CABINET MATERIALS

A. Exposed Cabinet Materials:
1. Plastic Laminate: Grade HGS.
B. Semi exposed Cabinet Materials:
1. Plastic Laminate: Grade VGS.
a. Provide plastic laminate for semi exposed surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Provide plastic laminate for interior faces of doors and drawer fronts.
2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Provide thermoset decorative panels for semi
exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 12 32 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.3 DESIGN, COLOR, AND FINISH

A. Design: Provide manufactured wood casework based on the details of the authorized
person on site.
B. Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Match Architect’s Sample.
C. PVC Edge banding Color: Match Architect’s sample.
D. Solid-Surfacing Material Colors and Patterns: Match Architects’ Sample.

2.4 CASEWORK HARDWARE

A. Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard satin-
finish commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware.
1. Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening to
particleboard except where hardware is through-bolted from back side.
B. Butt Hinges: Stainless-steel, semi concealed, 5-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA
A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips.
C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, Type B01602[, self-
closing].
D. Pulls: Solid stainless-steel wire pulls.
E. Pulls: Semi recessed plastic pulls.
F. Door Catches: [Nylon-roller spring catch]
G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.
1. Box Drawer Slides: [Grade 1].
2. File Drawer Slides: [Grade 1HD-100].
3. Pencil Drawer Slides: [Grade 2].
H. Drawer and Hinged Door Locks: Cylindrical (cam) type, 5-pin tumbler, complying with
BHMA A156.11, Grade 1.

2.5 COUNTERTOPS
A. Countertops, General: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane
free of defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over base cabinets.
B. Plastic-Laminate Tops: Plastic-laminate sheet, shop bonded to both sides of [3/4-inch
(19-mm)] [1-1/8-inch (29-mm)] plywood or particleboard.
1. Plastic Laminate for Flat Tops: Grade HGS.
2. Plastic Laminate for Formed Tops: Grade HGP.
3. Plastic Laminate for Formed Tops: Grade HGP.
4. Provide plastic-laminate edgings of the same material as top on front edge of
top, on top edges of backsplashes and end splashes, and on ends of tops and
splashes.
5. Construct top and backsplash from one piece of plastic laminate with rolled
edges and coved intersection. Where indicated, provide separate end splashes
fitted to top.
6. Use exterior plywood or exterior glue particleboard for countertops containing
sinks.
P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 12 32 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

C. Solid-Surfacing-Material Tops: 1-3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing material.

1. Front: 50mm Bullnose.
2. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing material; [slightly
eased at edge] [beveled edge] [radius edge with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) radius].

2.6 WALL SHELVING

A. Plastic-Laminate Shelving: Plastic-laminate sheet, Grade HGL or HGP, shop bonded to
both sides of [particleboard] [plywood]. Sand surfaces to which plastic laminate is
bonded.
1. Shelf Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2. Edge Treatment: Finish both edges with solid-wood edging applied before
plastic laminate.
B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: [Zinc-plated] [Powder-coated] steel standards and shelf
brackets, complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04102 and B04112, surface mounted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CASEWORK INSTALLATION

A. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where
manufactured wood casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe
for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
B. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets’ straight, level, and plumb. Adjust sub tops within 1/16 inch
(1.5 mm) of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to masonry or framing, wood blocking, or
reinforcements in walls and partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar
adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
C. Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets’ straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms
within 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, or
framing, blocking, or reinforcements in walls or partitions. Align similar adjoining doors
to a tolerance of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
D. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or
bind. Lubricate operating hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF TOPS

A. Field Jointing: Where possible make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels,
splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be
joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate
field joints where shown on Shop Drawings.
1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping
devices located within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at
intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Tighten according to manufacturer's
written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.

P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 12 32 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more
fasteners at each front, end, and back.
C. Secure [backsplashes] [and] [end splashes] to walls with adhesive.
D. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or
another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material
manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SHELVING

A. Securely fasten shelf standards to masonry, partition framing, wood blocking, or
reinforcements in partitions.
B. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves.
C. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled
areas to match original factory finish, as approved by the authorized person on site.
B. Protection: Provide 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering
over countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches
(1220 mm) o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion.

-END OF SECTION 12 32 00-

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 12 35 53
Laboratory Casework
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
` 1. Metal laboratory casework.
2. Plastic-laminate laboratory casework.
3. Utility-space framing.
4. Filler and closure panels.
5. Laboratory countertops.
6. Tables.
7. Shelves.
8. Laboratory sinks and troughs.
9. Laboratory accessories.
10. Water, laboratory gas, and electrical service fitting.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design laboratory casework, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by the authorized person on site, using seismic performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
B. Seismic Performance: Laboratory casework, including attachments to other work, shall
withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to [SEI/ASCE 7]
1. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration in accordance with the
National Structural Code of the Philippines

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each type of cabinet finish.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For laboratory casework indicated to comply with seismic
performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the authorized
person on site responsible for their preparation.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports for Casework: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests
performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory casework
with requirements of specified product standard.
B. Product Test Reports for Countertop Surface Material: Based on evaluation of
comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of
P a g e | 1 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

laboratory countertop surface materials with requirements specified for chemical and
physical resistance.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of
custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory casework from a single source from a single
manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
C. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of laboratory casework
by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers'
laboratory casework of similar sizes and similar door and drawer configurations and
complying with the Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements."
D. Casework Product Standard: Comply with SEFA 8, "Laboratory Furniture - Casework,
Shelving and Tables - Recommended Practices."
E. Flammable Liquid Storage: Where cabinets are indicated for solvent or flammable liquid
storage, provide units that are listed and labeled as complying with requirements in
NFPA 30 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. G.
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CABINET AND TABLE MATERIALS

A. Metal: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M;
matt finish; suitable for exposed applications

2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINET MATERIALS

A. General:
1. Adhesives and Composite Wood Products: Products shall not contain urea
formaldehyde.
2. Adhesives: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
3. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Products shall comply with the
testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health
Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

P a g e | 2 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

4. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD

3. 5. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with
satin finish, 3 mm thick at doors and drawer fronts, 1 mm thick elsewhere.
a. Colors: As selected by the authorized person on site from the
manufacturer's full range.
B. Exposed Materials:
1. Plastic Laminate: Grade HGS.
a. Colors: As selected by the authorized person on site from the
manufacturer's full range.
C. Semi-exposed Materials:
1. Plastic Laminate: Grade VGS
a. Colors: As selected by the authorized person on site from the
manufacturer's full range.

2.3 AUXILIARY CABINET MATERIALS

A. Acid Storage-Cabinet Lining: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, [glass-fiber cement board
complying with ASTM C 1186] [polyethylene or polypropylene] [polyethylene,
polypropylene, epoxy, or phenolic-composite lining material].
B. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear float glass complying with ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1,
Quality-Q3; not less than 6.0 mm thick.
C. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT,
Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality-Q3; not less than 5.0 mm thick. D. Glass for Glazed
Doors: Clear laminated tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind LT, Condition
A, Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3; with 2 lites not less than 3.0 mm thick and with clear,
polyvinyl butyral interlayer.

2.4 COUNTERTOP [TABLE TOP] [SHELF] [TROUGH] [AND] [SINK] MATERIALS

A. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
1. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by the authorized person on site
from the plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range.
B. Chemical-Resistant Plastic Laminate:
1. High-pressure decorative laminate, complying with NEMA LD 3, that has the
following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3,
Test Procedure 3.4.5:
a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28
percent), amyl acetate, benzene, butyl alcohol, carbon tetrachloride,
chloroform, dimethyl formamide, dioxane, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol,
ethyl ether, formaldehyde (37 percent), gasoline, gentian violet,
hydrogen peroxide (3 percent), methyl alcohol, methyl ethyl ketone,
methylene chloride, mono chlorobenzene, naphthalene, toluene,
trichloroethylene, xylene, zinc chloride (saturated).
b. Slight Effect: Cresol, tincture of iodine, sodium sulfide (15 percent).
P a g e | 3 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2. Color: Black. As selected by the authorized person on site from chemical-

resistant, plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range
C. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Products shall [be made with binder
containing no urea formaldehyde. comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."]
D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's standard waterproof adhesive
that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department
of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E. Epoxy: Factory-molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, non-specular
finish.
1. Physical Properties:
a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi (70 MPa).
b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi (1400 MPa).
c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100.
d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent.
e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F (127 deg C).
2. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when
tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:
a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28
percent), benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl
acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70
percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60 percent), and toluene.
b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50
percent).
3. Color: As selected by the authorized person on site from manufacturer's full
range
F. Phenolic Composite: Solid, high-pressure decorative laminate, complying with NEMA LD
3, Grade CGS.
1. Chemical Resistance: Composite countertop material has the following ratings
when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure
3.4.5:
a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28
percent), ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, formaldehyde (37 percent),
furfural, phosphoric acid (85 percent), sulfuric acid (33 percent), toluene.
2. Color: As selected by the authorized person on site from the manufacturer's
full range.
G. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, [Type 304] [Type 316L].

P a g e | 4 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.5 METAL CABINETS AND TABLES

A. Fabrication: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies for
interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts. Perform assembly on
precision jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and
channels. Except where otherwise specified, integrally frame and weld cabinet bodies to
form dirt and vermin-resistant enclosures. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for
sink support. Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to
3/32 inch (1.5 to 2.4 mm).
B. Flush Doors: Outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with full-height channel
reinforcements at center of door. Fill doors with noncombustible, sound-deadening
material.
C. Drawers: Fronts made from outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with no
raw metal edges at top. Sides, back, and bottom fabricated in one piece with rolled or
formed top of sides for stiffening and comfortable grasp for drawer removal.
D. Tables: Welded tubing legs, not less than 2 inches (50 mm) square with channel
stretchers as needed to comply with product standard. Weld or bolt stretchers to legs
and cross-stretchers, and bolt legs to table aprons. Provide leveling device welded to
bottom of each leg.
E. Utility-Space Framing: Laboratory casework manufacturer's standard steel framing units
consisting of 2 steel slotted channels connected at top and bottom by U-shaped
brackets.
F. Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed to close spaces
between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from the same
material and with the same finish as cabinets and with hemmed or flanged edges unless
otherwise indicated.

2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. CNEX.
2. Elite.
B. Design: Reveal overlay.
C. Construction: Provide plastic-laminate-faced laboratory casework of the following
minimum construction:
1. Bottoms and Ends of Cabinets, and Tops of Wall Cabinets and Tall Cabinets:
3/4- inch- (19-mm-) thick particleboard, plastic-laminate faced.
2. Shelves: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick plywood, plastic-laminate faced.
3. Backs of Cabinets: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick particleboard, plastic-laminate
faced.
4. Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick particleboard, plastic-laminate faced.
5. Drawer Sides and Backs: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick solid-wood or veneer-core
hardwood plywood, with glued dovetail or multiple-dowel joints.
P a g e | 5 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

6. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick hardboard glued and dadoed into
front, back, and sides of drawers.
7. Doors: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, with particleboard or MDF cores, plastic-
laminate faced.
D. Utility-Space Framing: Laboratory casework manufacturer's standard steel framing units
consisting of 2 steel slotted channels connected at top and bottom by U-shaped
brackets.
E. Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed to close spaces
between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same
material and with same finish as adjacent exposed cabinet surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.

2.7 METAL CABINET FINISH

A. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Laboratory casework manufacturer's standard two-coat,
chemical-resistant, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to
achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with
acceptance levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8. Acceptance level for
chemical spot test shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions.
2. Colors for Metal Laboratory Casework Finish: As selected by the authorized
person on site from manufacturer's full range

2.8 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide laboratory casework manufacturer's standard, commercial-quality,
heavy-duty hardware.
B. Hinges: Stainless-steel 5-knuckle hinges with antifriction bearings and rounded tips.
C. Hinged Door and Drawer Pulls: Stainless steel or chrome-plated brass back-mounted
pulls.
D. Sliding Door Pulls: Stainless-steel or chrome-plated recessed flush pulls.
E. Door Catches: Dual, self-aligning, permanent magnet catches.
F. Locks for Metal Cabinets: Cam or half-mortise type, brass with chrome-plated finish;
complying with BHMA A156.11, Type E07281, E07111, or E07021.
1. Provide a minimum of two keys per lock and two master keys.
2. Provide on all drawers and doors.
3. Keying: Key each lock separately.
G. Locks for Wood and Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: Cam type, brass with chrome-plated
finish; complying with BHMA A156.11, Type E07281.
1. Provide a minimum of two keys per lock and two master keys.
2. Provide on all drawers and doors.
3. Keying: Key each lock separately.

P a g e | 6 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

H. Adjustable Shelf Supports for [Wood] [and] [Plastic-Laminate] Cabinets: Powder-coated

steel shelf rests complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B04013.
I. Adjustable Wall Shelf Supports: Surface-type steel standards and steel shelf brackets,
with epoxy powder-coated finish, complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04102 and
B04112.

2.9 COUNTERTOPS, TABLE TOPS, SHELVES, TROUGHS, AND SINK

A. Countertops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of
defects. Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly beveled. Provide front
and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm).
B. Sinks, General: Provide sizes indicated or laboratory casework manufacturer's closest
standard size of equal or greater volume, as approved by the authorized person on site.
1. Outlets: Provide with strainers and tailpieces, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Overflows: For each sink except cup sinks, provide overflow of standard
beehive or open-top design with separate strainer. Height 2 inches (50 mm) less
than sink depth. Provide the same material as the strainer.
C. Plastic-Laminate Countertops, Table Tops and Shelves:
1. Countertops: Chemical-resistant plastic laminate shop bonded to top surface
and exposed edges of 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick core with plastic-laminate
backing bonded to bottom surface.
a. Backsplash Core Thickness: [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)].
b. Countertop Core: exterior plywood.
c. Countertop Core for Counters Containing Sinks: exterior plywood.
d. Countertop Configuration: Flat, with square edges, and flat
backsplashes and end splashes. Finish faces and exposed edges of
splashes with same plastic laminate as top.
e. Countertop Configuration: Post-formed, with raised, rolled edge and
integral coved backsplash with rolled top edge. Construct top and
backsplash from one piece of plastic laminate. Where indicated, provide
separate end splashes of same material as top and fitted to top.
f. Plastic-Laminate Grade for Flat Countertops: [HGS] [HGL] [HDS].
g. Plastic-Laminate Grade for Post-formed Countertops: HGP.
h. Plastic-Laminate Grade for Backing: BKL.
2. Table Tops: Chemical-resistant plastic laminate shop bonded to top surface
and exposed edges of [3/4-inch- (19-mm-)] [1-inch- (25-mm-)] [1-3/16-inch- (30-
mm-)] thick core with plastic-laminate backing bonded to bottom surface.
a. Table-Top Core: exterior plywood].
b. Plastic-Laminate Grade for Tables: [HGS] [HGL] [HDS].
c. Plastic-Laminate Grade for Backing: BKL.
3. Plastic-Laminate Shelves: Chemical-resistant plastic laminate shop bonded to
both faces and all edges of [3/4-inch- (19-mm-)] [1-inch- (25-mm-)] thick core.
P a g e | 7 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

a. Shelf Core: exterior plywood.

b. Plastic-Laminate Grade for Shelves: HGL.
D. Epoxy Countertops, Table Tops and Sinks:
1. Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with factory cutouts for sinks, holes for
service fittings and accessories, and with butt joints assembled with epoxy
adhesive and concealed metal splines.
a. Countertop Configuration: Raised (marine) edge, 1-inch (25-mm)
minimum thickness, with integral or applied raised edge having rounded
edge and corners, and with integral coved backsplash.
b. Countertop Construction: Epoxy composition not less than 1/4 inch (6
mm) thick, laminated to backing.
2. Table-Top Fabrication:
a. Table-Top Configuration: Raised (marine) edge, 1-inch (25-mm)]
minimum thickness, with integral or applied raised edge having rounded
edge and corners.
b. Table-Top Construction: Epoxy composition not less than 1/4 inch (6
mm) thick, laminated to backing
c. Sink Fabrication: Molded in 1 piece with smooth surfaces, coved
corners, and bottom sloped to outlet; 1/2-inch (13-mm) minimum
thickness.
d. Provide with polypropylene strainers and tailpieces.
e. Provide sinks for drop-in installation with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick lip
around perimeter of sink.
f. Provide integral sinks in epoxy countertops, bonded to countertops
with invisible joint line.
g. Provide manufacturer's recommended adjustable support system for
table- and cabinet-type installations.
E. Phenolic-Composite Countertops, Table Tops and Shelves:
1. Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with cutouts for sinks, holes for service
fittings and accessories, and with butt joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and
concealed metal splines.
a. Countertop Configuration: Flat, 3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)]
thick, with beveled edge and corners, and with drip groove and integral
coved backsplash.
2. Table-Top Fabrication:
a. Table-Top Configuration: Flat, 3/4 inch (19 mm) beveled edge and
corners, and with drip groove at perimeter.
3. Shelf Configuration: Flat, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick, with beveled and
corners.
F. Stainless-Steel Countertops: Made from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.062-inch
(1.59-mm) nominal thickness, with No. 4 satin finish.

P a g e | 8 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Extend top down 1 inch (25 mm) at edges with a 1/2-inch (13-mm) return
flange under frame. Apply heavy coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening
mastic to undersurface.
2. Form backsplash covers an integral with top surface.
3. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of countertops containing
sinks; pitch two ways to sink.
4. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of countertops at sinks, where
indicated; pitch two ways to sink.
5. Punch holes for service fittings at the factory.
6. Reinforce underside of countertop with channels or use thicker metal sheet
where necessary.
7. Weld shop-made joints.
8. Where field-made joints are required, provide hairline butt-joints
mechanically bolted through continuous channels welded to underside at edges
of joined ends. Keep field jointing to a minimum.
9. Where stainless-steel sinks or cup sinks occur in stainless-steel countertops,
factory-weld into one integral unit
10. After fabricating and welding, grind surfaces smooth and polish as needed.
Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leave
surfaces clean.
G. Stainless-Steel Shelves: Made from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-
mm) nominal thickness, with No. 4 satin finish. Weld shop-made joints. Fold [down] [up]
front edge 3/4 inch (19 mm); fold up back edge 3 inches (75 mm). Provide integral
stiffening brackets, formed by folding up ends 3/4 inch (19 mm) and welding to
upturned [back edge] [front and back edges]. After fabricating, grind welds smooth and
polish as needed. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and
leave surfaces clean.
H. Stainless-Steel Sinks: Made from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-
mm) nominal thickness. Fabricate with corners rounded and coved to at least 5/8-inch
(16-mm) radius. Slope sinks bottoms to outlet. Provide double-wall construction for sink
partitions with top edge rounded to at least 1/2-inch (13-mm) diameter. Provide
continuous butt-welded joints. After fabricating and welding, grind surfaces smooth and
polish as needed. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and
leave surfaces clean.
1. Punch holes for fittings at the factory.
2. Provide with stainless-steel strainers and tailpieces.
3. Provide with integral rims except where located in stainless-steel
countertops.
4. Apply 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening
mastic to under sink surfaces.
I. Cup Sinks: Polypropylene 3-by-9-inch (75-by-228-mm) oval.
1. Provide with polypropylene strainers and integral tailpieces.
P a g e | 9 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.10 LABORATORY ACCESSORIES

A. Reagent Shelves: Provide as indicated, fabricated from same material as adjacent
countertop, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Burette Rods: Aluminum or stainless-steel rods, 1/2 inch (13 mm) in diameter and 18
inches (450 mm) long, threaded on 1 end to fit tapered plug adapter for flush socket
receptacle. Provide with tapered plug adapter and receptacle.
C. Upright Rod Assembly and Metal Crossbar: Aluminum or stainless steel. Two vertical
rods and 1 horizontal crossbar, 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter and 36 inches (900 mm)
long, unless otherwise indicated; 2 flush socket receptacles and 2 crossbar clamps. Ends
of vertical rods are tapered to fit receptacles; all other rod ends are rounded.
D. Greenlaw Arm Assembly: Aluminum or stainless-steel vertical rod, tapered on one end
to fit flush socket receptacle. Adjustable crossbar of hardwood with black, acid-resistant
finish, secured to upright with adjustable clamp. Provide with receptacle.
E. Lattice Assembly: Aluminum or stainless-steel, vertical and horizontal rod lattice
assembly with 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter rods at approximately 12 inches (300 mm)
o.c. with 2 flush socket receptacles for mounting.
1. Size: [36 inches (900 mm)] [48 inches (1200 mm)] wide by [24 inches (600
mm)] [36 inches (900 mm)] high.
F. Pegboards: Polypropylene, epoxy, or phenolic-composite pegboards with removable
polypropylene pegs and stainless-steel drip troughs with drain outlet.
G. Pegboards: Stainless-steel pegboards with removable polypropylene pegs and stainless-steel
drip troughs with drain outlet.

2.11 WATER AND LABORATORY GAS SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. BS Method.
2. Chicago Faucet Company (The); a Geberit company.
B. Service Fittings: Provide units that comply with SEFA 7, "Laboratory and Hospital
Fixtures - Recommended Practices." Provide fittings complete with washers, locknuts,
nipples, and other installation accessories. Include wall and deck flanges, escutcheons,
handle extension rods, and similar items.
1. Provide units that comply with "Vandal-Resistant Faucets and Fixtures"
recommendations in SEFA 7.
C. Materials: Fabricated from cast or forged red brass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Reagent-Grade Water Service Fittings: Polypropylene, PVC, or PVDF for parts
in contact with water.
D. Finish: Acid- and solvent-resistant powder coating complying with requirements in SEFA
7 for corrosion-resistant finishes.

P a g e | 10 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Provide chemical-resistant powder coating in laboratory casework

manufacturer's standard metallic brown, aluminum, white, or other color as
approved by the authorized person on site.
E. Water Valves and Faucets: Provide units complying with ASME A112.18.1, with
renewable seats, designed for working pressure up to 80 psig (550 kPa).
1. Vacuum Breakers: Provide ASSE 1035 vacuum breakers on water fittings with
serrated outlets.
2. Aerators: Provide aerators on water fittings that do not have serrated outlets.
3. Self-Closing Valves: Provide self-closing valves where indicated.
F. Ground-Key Cocks: Tapered core and handle of one-piece forged brass, ground and
lapped, and held in place under constant spring pressure. Provide units designed for
working pressure up to 40 psig (280 kPa), with serrated outlets.
G. Ball Valves: Chrome-plated ball and PTFE seals. Handle requires no more than 5 lbf (22
N) to operate. Provide units designed for working pressure up to 75 psig (520 kPa), with
serrated outlets.
1. Where ball valves are indicated for fuel-gas use, provide locking safety handles
that must be [pushed in] [or] [pulled up] before being turned on [unless
otherwise indicated].
H. Steam Valves: Stainless-steel seat and PTFE seat disc. Provide units designed for steam
working pressure up to 20 psig (140 kPa), with serrated outlets.
I. Needle Valves: Provide units with renewable, self-centering, floating cones and
renewable seats of stainless steel or Monel metal, with removable serrated outlets. 1.
Provide units designed for working pressure up to [60 psig (410 kPa)] [100 psig (690
kPa)] [125 psig (860 kPa)].
J. Hand of Fittings: Furnish right-hand fittings unless fitting designation is followed by "L."
K. Remote-Control Valves: Provide needle valves, straight-through or angle type as
indicated for fume hoods and where indicated.
L. Handles: Provide three- or four-wing, molded plastic or powder-coated metal handles
for valves unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide lever-type handles for ground-key cocks. Lever handle aligns with
outlet when valve is closed and is perpendicular to outlet when valve is fully
open.
2. Provide lever-type handles for ball valves unless otherwise indicated. Lever
handle aligns with outlet when valve is closed and is perpendicular to outlet
when valve is fully open.
3. Provide heat-resistant plastic handles for steam valves.
4. Provide knurled, molded plastic handles for needle valves.
M. Service-Outlet Identification: Provide color-coded plastic discs with embossed
identification, secured to each service-fitting handle to be tamper resistant. Comply
with SEFA 7 for colors and embossed identification.

P a g e | 11 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.12 ELECTRICAL SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Service Fittings, General: Provide units complete with metal housings, receptacles,
terminals, switches, pilot lights, device plates, accessories, and gaskets required for
mounting on laboratory casework.
B. Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, and UL 498. Duplex type,
Configuration 5 20R.
1. Receptacle Grade: Hospital grade unless otherwise indicated.
2. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with UL 943,
Class A, Hospital grade, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is
tripped.
C. Switches: Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. Provide single-pole, double-pole, or 3-
way switches as required; rated 120 to 277-V ac; and in amperage capacities to suit
units served.
1. Provide pilot light adjacent to switch or neon-lighted handle, illuminated when
switch is "ON," where noted as "PL" next to switch identification.
2. Provide thermal-overload switches, single or double pole, as required, with
maximum overcurrent trip setting to suit particular motor controls.
D. Service Fittings, General: Provide units with metal housings and gaskets required for
mounting on laboratory casework. Receptacles, terminals, switches, pilot lights, device
plates, and accessories are specified in Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."
E. Pedestal-Type Fittings: Cast-aluminum housings with sloped single face or two faces, as
indicated, with neoprene gasket under base and with concealed mounting holes in base
for attaching to laboratory casework. Provide holes tapped for conduits.
F. Line-Type Fittings: Provide with cast-metal boxes with threaded holes for mounting on
rigid steel conduit. Provide cover plates the same size as boxes.
G. Recessed-Type Fittings: Provide with galvanized-steel boxes.
H. Finishes for Service-Fitting Components: Provide housings or boxes for pedestal- and
line-type fittings with manufacturer's standard baked-on, chemical-resistant enamel in
color as selected by the authorized person on site from manufacturer's full range.
I. Cover Plates: Provide satin finish, Type 304, stainless-steel cover plates with formed,
beveled edges.
J. Cover-Plate Identification: Use 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) high letters unless otherwise
indicated. For stainless steel or chrome-plated metal, stamp or etch plate and fill in
letters with black enamel.
1. Provide on all cover plates.
a. Receptacles other than standard 125-V duplex, grounding type.
b. Switches and thermal-overload switches.
c. Pilot lights when located remotely from associated equipment or
switch, where function is not obvious.
d. Receptacles, switches, and other locations indicated.
2. Provide the following information:

P a g e | 12 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

a. Voltage and phase for receptacles other than standard 125-V duplex,
grounding type.
b. Indicate equipment being controlled by switches and thermal-overload
switches.
c. Indicate equipment being controlled for pilot lights when located
remotely from associated equipment or switch, where function is not
obvious.
d. Number of breaker in panel board that controls device.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS

A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as
required, using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work,
apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
B. Utility-Space Framing: Secure to floor with two fasteners at each frame. Fasten to
partition framing, wood blocking, or metal reinforcements in partitions and to base
cabinets.
C. Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to utility-space framing, partition framing, wood
blocking, or reinforcements in partitions with fasteners spaced not more than 24 inches
(600 mm) o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
1. Where base cabinets are installed away from walls, fasten to floor at toe space
at not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and at sides of cabinets with not less
than 2 fasteners per side.
D. Wall Cabinets: Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, or
reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less
than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
E. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.
F. Adjust laboratory casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate
smoothly without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating
hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS

A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Abut top and edge surfaces in one
true plane with flush hairline joints and with internal supports placed. Locate joints only
where shown on Shop Drawings.
B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop-made joints using
dowels, splines, fasteners, adhesives, and sealants. Prepare edges in the shop for field-
made joints.
1. Use concealed clamping devices for field-made joints in plastic-laminate
countertops. Locate clamping devices within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back

P a g e | 13 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Tighten according to
manufacturer's written instructions to exert a uniform heavy pressure at joints.
C. Fastening:
1. Secure countertops, except for epoxy countertops, to cabinets with Z-type
fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each cabinet front, end,
and back.
2. Secure epoxy countertops to cabinets with epoxy cement, applied at each
corner and along perimeter edges at not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c.
3. Where necessary to penetrate countertops with fasteners, countersink heads
approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) and plug hole flush with material equal to
countertop in chemical resistance, hardness, and appearance.
D. Seal unfinished edges and cutouts in plastic-laminate countertops with a heavy coat of
polyurethane varnish.
E. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of countertop, curb, and splash with
walls. Match materials and finish to adjacent laboratory casework. Use chemical-
resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where recommended by
manufacturer.
F. Carefully dress joints smoothly, remove surface scratches, and clean the entire surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SINKS

A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3.
B. Underside Installation of Epoxy Sinks: Use laboratory casework manufacturer's
recommended adjustable support system for table- and cabinet-type installations. Set
top edge of sink unit in sink and countertop manufacturers' recommended chemical-
resistant sealing compound or adhesive and firmly secure.
C. Semi-flush Installation of Stainless-Steel Sinks: Before setting, apply sink and countertop
manufacturers' recommended sealant under rim lip and along top.
D. Drop-in Installation of Epoxy Sinks: Rout groove in countertop to receive sink rim if not
prepared in shop. Set the sink in adhesive and fill the remainder of the groove with
sealant or adhesive. Use procedures and products recommended by sink and
countertop manufacturers.
E. Drop-in Installation of [Epoxy] [and] [Polypropylene] Cup Sinks: Rout groove in
countertop to receive sink rim if not prepared in shop. Set the sink in adhesive and fill
the remainder of the groove with sealant or adhesive. Use procedures and products
recommended by sink and countertop manufacturers.
F. Surface Installation of [Epoxy] [and] [Polypropylene] Cup Sinks: Set sink in sealant or
adhesive. Use procedures and products recommended by sink and countertop
manufacturers.

P a g e | 14 of 15
 Section 12 35 53
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.4 INSTALLATION OF LABORATORY ACCESSORIES

A. Install accessories according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3,
and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Securely fasten adjustable shelving supports, stainless-steel shelves, and pegboards to
partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions.
C. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves.
Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.
D. Securely fasten pegboards to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in
partitions.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Comply with requirements in Divisions 22 and 26 Sections for installing water and
laboratory gas service fittings and electrical devices.
B. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and
manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink- and countertop-
mounted fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or countertop
material. Securely anchor fittings to laboratory casework unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled
areas to match original factory finish, as approved by the authorized person on site.
B. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other
suitable water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48
inches (1200 mm) o.c.

-END OF SECTION 12 35 53-

P a g e | 15 of 15
 Section 12 35 70
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 12 35 70
Healthcare Casework
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Stainless-steel medical casework.
2. Stainless-steel countertops and integral sinks.
3. Stainless-steel shelving.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design healthcare casework, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by the authorized person on site, using seismic performance requirements
indicated.
B. Seismic Performance: Provide healthcare casework, including attachments to other work,
capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to
[SEI/ASCE 7].
1. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period (Sds).
2. Component Importance Factor is 1.5.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
C. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For healthcare casework indicated to comply with seismic
performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the authorized
person on site responsible for their preparation.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain healthcare casework through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of healthcare casework by
referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' metal
medical casework of similar sizes, similar door and drawer configurations, and
complying with the Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70 by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

P a g e | 1 of 7
 Section 12 35 70
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CASEWORK MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled commercial steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M;
matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of
flatness.
C. Nominal Stainless-Steel Thicknesses for Stainless-Steel Medical Casework:
1. Sides, Ends, Fixed Backs, Bottoms, Cabinet Tops, Soffits, and Items Not
Otherwise Indicated: 0.050 inch (1.27). Bottoms may be 0.038 inch (0.95 mm) if
reinforced.
2. Back Panels, Doors, Drawer Fronts and Bodies, and Shelves: 0.038 inch (0.95
mm) except 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) for unreinforced shelves more than 36 inches
(900 mm) long.
3. Intermediate Horizontal Rails, Center Posts, Tubular Legs, and Top Gussets:
0.062 inch (1.59 mm).
D. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear float glass complying with ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1,
Quality-Q3; not less than 6.0 mm thick.
E. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT,
Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality-Q3; not less than 5.0 mm thick.
F. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear laminated tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1172,
Kind LT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3; with 2 lites not less than 3.0 mm thick
and with clear, polyvinyl butyral interlayer.
G. Pegboard: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) perforated hardboard, complying with AHA A135.4, Class 1
tempered; with painted finish sealing faces, edges, and perimeter of holes.
H. Pegboard: Perforated stainless-steel sheet, 0.050-inch (1.27-mm) nominal thickness
I. Pegboard: Perforated steel sheet, 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal thickness, with
powder-coated finish.
J. Insulation for Warming Cabinets: Semi-rigid, glass-fiber board insulation complying with
ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB.

2.2 CABINET FABRICATION

A. General: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies for
interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts. Perform assembly on
precision jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and
channels. Integrally frame and weld to form a dirt and vermin-resistant enclosure.
Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32 inch (1.5 to
2.4 mm).
B. Metal Flush Doors: Outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with full-height
channel reinforcements at center of door. Fill doors with noncombustible, sound-
deadening material.3

P a g e | 2 of 7
 Section 12 35 70
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

C. Glazed Doors: Hollow-metal stiles and rails of similar construction as flush doors, with
glass held in resilient channels or gasket material.
D. Metal Drawers: Fronts made from outer and inner pans that nest into box formation,
with no raw metal edges at top.
E. Metal Shelves: Front, back, and ends formed down, with edges returned horizontally at
front and back to form reinforcing channels. Provide clips or other means to support
shelves and allow height of shelves to be adjusted in increments of not more than 2
inches (50 mm).
F. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and
indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets
and with hemmed or flanged edges.
G. Trim Flanges: Formed metal trim fabricated from same material and with same finish as
cabinets. Provide at perimeter of recessed cabinets.

2.3 SPECIALTY CABINETS

A. Narcotics Cabinets: Construct stainless steel as individual, freestanding units with
finished sides and top and double-walled bottom. Provide with double-pan flush outer
door and 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) nominal thickness, single-pan inner door, both with
locks, each individually keyed and not master keyed.
B. Specimen Pass-Through Cabinets: Construct of stainless steel as through-wall units with
double-walled construction and smooth interior. Provide with interlocking hardware
that prevents each door from being opened when the other door is open. Provide a
removable stainless-steel spill tray and trim flanges for both faces.
C. Warming Cabinets: Recessed units covered on back, top, and sides with 1-inch- (25-mm-
) thick insulation. Insulate the door and equip it with a heat-resistant gasket. Provide
with thermostatically controlled heating system to maintain temperature within 10 deg
F (5.5 deg C) of temperature setting that can be varied from 97 to 160 deg F (36 to 71
deg C).
1. Equip units with fan-forced electric, steam and heating systems.
D. Desk Units: Recessed units with sloped stainless-steel writing surface, magnetic
stainless-steel back panel, and built-in fluorescent light fixture.

2.4 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH

A. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional satin finish matching No. 4
finish with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with a long
dimension of each piece.
B. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces clean.

2.5 CABINET HARDWARE

A. General: Provide healthcare casework manufacturer's standard, commercial-quality,
heavy-duty hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type.
P a g e | 3 of 7
 Section 12 35 70
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Hinges: Stainless-steel 5-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with
antifriction bearings and hospital tips. Provide 2 for doors 48 inches (1200 mm) high or
less and 3 for doors more than 48 inches (1200 mm) high.
C. Continuous Hinges: Stainless-steel continuous hinges complying with BHMA A156.9,
Grade 1. Provide for narcotics cabinets and specimen pass-through cabinets.
D. Hinged Door and Drawer Pulls: stainless-steel, back-mounted pulls.
E. Sliding Door Pulls: Stainless-steel or chrome-plated flush pulls.
F. Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catches. Provide 2 catches on doors more than 48
inches (1200 mm) high.
G. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, epoxy-coated steel or zinc-plated steel, self-closing, ball-
bearing drawer slides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed;
complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.
1. Provide [Grade 1] [Grade 1HD-100] for drawers not more than 6 inches (150
mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide.
2. Provide [Grade 1HD-100] [Grade 1HD-200] for drawers more than 6 inches
(150 mm) high or 24 inches (600 mm) wide.
3. Standard Duty (Grade 1): Full extension type.
4. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 or Grade 1HD-200): Full-overtravel-extension
type.
H. Locks: Cam or half-mortise type; brass with chrome-plated finish; complying with BHMA
A156.11, Type E07281, E07261, E07111, or E07021.
1. Provide a minimum of two (2) keys per lock and two (2) master keys.
2. Provide locks on all drawers and doors.
3. Keying: Key each lock separately.

2.6 STAINLESS-STEEL COUNTERTOPS, SHELVES AND SINKS

A. Countertops: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of defects. Ease
exposed edges and corners. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over
base cabinets.
1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 316, not less than 0.062-inch
(1.59-mm) nominal thickness, with No. 4 directional satin finish.
2. Extend top down 1 inch (25 mm) at edges with a 1/2-inch (13-mm) return
flange under frame. Apply heavy coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening
mastic to undersurface.
3. Form backsplash covers an integral with top surface.
4. Provide rolled edges unless otherwise indicated.
5. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of countertops containing
sinks; pitch two ways to sink to provide drainage without channeling or
grooving.
6. Reinforce underside of countertop with channels or use thicker metal sheet
where necessary to insure rigidity without deflection.
7. Weld shop-made joints.
P a g e | 4 of 7
 Section 12 35 70
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

8. Fabricate units for installation without field-made joints.

9. Fabricate units for field assembly, where necessary, using [welded joints]
[tight-fitting butt-joints mechanically bolted through continuous channels
welded to underside at edges of joined ends].[ Locate field-made joints only
where indicated.]
10. Where stainless-steel sinks or cup sinks occur in stainless-steel countertops,
factory weld into one integral unit.
11. After fabricating and welding, grind surfaces smooth and polish as needed to
produce uniform, directionally textured finish with no evidence of welds and free
of cross scratches. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces clean.
B. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Made from stainless-steel sheet, ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type
304, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-mm) nominal thickness, with No. 4 directional satin
finish. Weld shop-made joints. Fold down front edge 3/4 inch (19 mm); fold up back
edge 3 inches (75 mm). Provide integral stiffening brackets, formed by folding up ends
3/4 inch (19 mm) and welding to upturned front and back edges. After fabricating, grind
welds smooth and polish as needed to produce uniform, directionally textured finish
with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Passivate and rinse surfaces;
remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.
C. Sinks: Provide sizes indicated or healthcare casework manufacturer's closest standard
size of equal or greater volume as approved by the authorized person on site.
1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 316, not less than 0.050-inch
(1.27-mm) nominal thickness. Fabricate with corners rounded and coved to at
least 5/8-inch (16-mm) radius. Slope sink bottoms to outlet. Provide double-wall
construction for sink partitions with top edge rounded to at least 1/2-inch (13-
mm) diameter. Provide continuous butt-welded joints after fabricating and
welding, grind surfaces smooth and polish as needed. Passivate and rinse
surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.
2. Punch holes for fittings at the factory.
3. Provide with stainless-steel strainers and tailpieces, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Where indicated, provide stainless-steel overflow of standard beehive or
open-top design with separate stainless-steel strainer. Height 2 inches (50 mm)
less than sink depth.
5. Apply 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening
mastic to under sink surfaces.

2.7 WATER AND COMPRESSED-AIR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Service Fittings: Provide units that comply with SEFA 7, "Laboratory and Hospital
Fixtures--Recommended Practices." Provide fittings complete with washers, locknuts,
nipples, and other installation accessories. Include wall and deck flanges, escutcheons,
handle extension rods, and similar items.
P a g e | 5 of 7
 Section 12 35 70
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. Materials: Fabricated from cast or forged red brass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Reagent-Grade Water Service Fittings: Polypropylene, PVC, or PVDF for parts
in contact with water.
C. Finish: Chromium plated.
D. Water Valves and Faucets: Provide units complying with ASME A112.18.1, with
renewable seats, designed for working pressure up to 80 psig (550 kPa).
1. Vacuum Breakers: Provide ASSE 1035 vacuum breakers on water fittings with
serrated outlets.
2. Aerators: Provide aerators on water fittings that do not have serrated outlets.
3. Self-Closing Valves: Provide self-closing valves where indicated.
4. Handles: Provide three- or four-arm, forged-brass handles for valves unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Needle Valves for Compressed Air: Provide units with renewable, self-centering, floating
cones and renewable seats of stainless steel or Monel metal, with removable serrated
outlets.
1. Provide units designed for working pressure up to 60 psig (410 kPa).
2. Handles: Provide knurled molded plastic handles.
F. Service-Outlet Identification: Provide color-coded plastic discs with embossed
identification, secured to each service-fitting handle to be tamper resistant. Comply
with SEFA 7 for colors and embossed identification.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS AND SHELVES

A. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where
healthcare casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate
fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
B. Recessed Cabinets: Set cabinets in openings and fasten to partition framing, wood
blocking, or reinforcements in partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
C. Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in
partitions with fasteners spaced not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Bolt adjacent
cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
D. Wall Cabinets: Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, or
reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less
than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
E. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fasten to masonry, partition framing, blocking, or
reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each shelf through upturned back edge at not less
than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
F. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.

P a g e | 6 of 7
 Section 12 35 70
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

G. Adjust healthcare casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate
smoothly without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating
hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS

A. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane with flush joints and with internal supports
placed. Locate joints only where shown on Shop Drawings.
B. Field-Made Joints: Provide welded joints in tops. Grind and polish surfaces to produce
uniform, directionally textured finish with no evidence of welds and free of cross
scratches. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leave
surfaces clean.
C. Field-Made Joints: Provide tight-fitting joints in tops using adhesives and fasteners
recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in the shop so Project-site
processing of top and edge surfaces is not required.
D. Fastening: Secure countertops to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or equivalent, using two
or more fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back. E. Provide chemical-resistant,
permanently elastic sealing compound for closures at junctures of top, curb, and splash
with walls as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Sections for installing water and compressed-
air service fittings.
B. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Set
bases and flanges of sink- and countertop-mounted fittings in sealant recommended by
manufacturer of sink or countertop material. Securely anchor fittings to healthcare
casework unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to
match original factory finish as approved by the authorized person on site.
B. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick
polyethylene or other suitable water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of
countertop at minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c.

-END OF SECTION 12 35 70-

P a g e | 7 of 7
 Section 12 36 61
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 12 36 61
Simulated Stone Countertops
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Solid-surface-material countertops [and backsplashes].
2. Quartz agglomerate countertops [and backsplashes].

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,
methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1. Front: [Straight, slightly eased at top] [Beveled] [3/4-inch (19-mm) bullnose]
[Radius edge with apron, 2 inches (50 mm) high with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) radius]
[1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laminated bullnose] [1-inch (25-mm) laminated bullnose].
2. Backsplash: [Straight, slightly eased at corner] [Beveled] [Radius edge with
3/8-inch (9.5-mm) radius].
3. Endsplash: [Matching backsplash] [None].
B. Countertops: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid surface material with front edge built up
with the same material.
C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid surface material.

2.2 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1. Front: [Straight, slightly eased at top] [Beveled] [3/4-inch (19-mm) bullnose]
[Radius edge with apron, 2 inches (50 mm) high with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) radius]
[1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laminated bullnose] [1-inch (25-mm) laminated bullnose].
2. Backsplash: [Straight, slightly eased at corner] [Beveled] [Radius edge with
3/8-inch (9.5-mm) radius].
3. Endsplash: [Matching backsplash] [None].
B. Countertops: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, quartz agglomerate with front edge built up with
same material].
C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, quartz agglomerate.

P a g e | 1 of 2
 Section 12 36 61
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.3 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Certified Wood Materials: Fabricate countertops with wood and wood-based products
produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification
body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest
Stewardship."
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide products that comply with the testing
and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, [Grade M-2] [Grade M-2-Exterior Glue] [made with binder
containing no urea formaldehyde].
D. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged,
touch sanded.
E. Adhesives: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
F. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
ANSI SS1.
1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work.
2. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated.
3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by the authorized person on site from
manufacturer's full range.
G. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a
matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of
Materials" Article of ANSI SS1.
1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work.
2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by the authorized person on site from the
manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into the underside
of the countertop. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match
countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully
dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

-END OF SECTION 12 36 61-

P a g e | 2 of 2
 Section 12 48 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 12 48 13
Entrance Floor Mats and Frames
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Entrance mats in recessed frames.
B. Related sections include the following:
1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slab depression grouting and
filling for recessed mats and frames and for recessed foot grilles and frames
2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim": for fabricated sheet
metal foot-grille drain pans.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specifications for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.
B. ASTM B 221 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
C. ASTM B 221M - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes Metric.
D. ASTM B 455 - Specification for Copper-Zinc-Lead Alloy (Leaded-Brass) Extruded Shapes.
E. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers -Tension.
F. ASTM D 746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomers by Impact.
G. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities (ANSI).
H. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers - Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide foot grilles and frames capable of withstanding the
following loads and stresses:
1. Uniform floor load of 300 lbf/sq. ft.
2. Wheel load of 350 lb per wheel.

P a g e | 1 of 7
 Section 12 48 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Items penetrating floor mats, foot grilles and frames, including the following:
a. Door control devices.
2. Divisions between mat sections.
3. Divisions between grille sections.
4. Perimeter floor moldings.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated.
1. Floor Mat: 12-inch- square, assembled sections of floor mat.
2. Tread Rail: 12-inch- long Sample of each type and color.
3. Foot Grille: 12-inch- square assembled sections.
4. Frame Members: 12-inch- long Sample of each type and color.
E. Maintenance Data: For floor mats to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in
the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA), BP 344 of the National Building Code of the Philippines,
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." and Sections 302 and 303
in ICC A117.1.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish floors to
receive floor mats and frames.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Entrance Tiles: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each
size, color, and pattern indicated, but no fewer than 10 units.

P a g e | 2 of 7
 Section 12 48 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ENTRANCE MATS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to Pawling Corporation;
Architectural Products Division.
B. Resilient Link Mats: 3/8-inch- or 7/16-inch- thick, reversible vinyl rubber rubber-tire link
mats with galvanized spring stainless-steel wire link rods, vulcanized edge-nosing trim,
steel reinforced end trim, and links consisting of rectangular units or continuous strips in
a heelproof, solid-weave pattern with no openings between links heel-proof, close-
weave pattern with openings between links not exceeding 1/8 inch wide by 1 inch long
open-weave pattern with openings between links about 1/2 inch wide by 1 inch long
1. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations Match Architect's sample
as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Mat Size: As indicated.
C. Rubber or Vinyl Mats: 1/4-inch- 3/8-inch- 7/16-inch- 1/2-inch- thick mats; with square
edges for recessed installations beveled edges for surface applications and with solid
sheet (no perforations) style perforated style, 1/4-inch diameter on standard spacing
perforated style, 3/16 by 3/4 inch on standard spacing, standard pyramid design
standard wide-wale corrugated hi-rib, narrow-wale corrugated top profile, and low-rib,
narrow-wale corrugated standard knob-base flat-base bottom surface.
1. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations Match Architect's sample
as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Mat Size: As indicated.
D. Cocoa Mats: Constructed from cocoa fiber yarn permanently bonded to PVC backing for
dimensional stability and resistance to shedding; 5/8- to 3/4-inch overall thickness; 1.5-
lb/sq. ft1-inch overall thickness; 2.0-lb/sq. ft 1-1/4-inch overall thickness; 2.5-lb/sq. ft
weight.
1. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations Match Architect's sample
as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Mat Size: As indicated.
E. Rubber-Tire Mats: Units of edge-grain-laminated and chenille-buffed, rubber-tire wall
cuts; bonded to sheet rubber or other durable flexible backing sheet to form 3/8- to
7/16- inch- thick, 12-inch- square tile wide, continuous linear strip up to 25 feet long.
1. Mat Size: As indicated.
F. Carpet-Type Mats: Nylon Polypropylene Olefin Polyester carpet bonded to 1/8- to 1/4-
inch thick, flexible vinyl backing to form mats 3/8 or 7/16 inch thick with no raveling
edges.
1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations
Match Architect's sample as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
2. Mat Size: As indicated.
P a g e | 3 of 7
 Section 12 48 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

G. Loop Filament Mats: 3M's "Nomad" loop filament vinyl material 3/8 inch 1/2 inch thick,
with solid vinyl sheet foam sheet backing and with built-in chemical agents to reduce
fungus and mildew.
1. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations Match Architect's sample
as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Mat Size: As indicated.
H. Nuway Mats: Nylon-reinforced, 1/2-inch- wide by 7/16-inch- 11/16-inch- thick,
vulcanized laminated rubber strips alternating with 9/16-inch- wide, profile shapes
assembled on 0.1055- inch- diameter, galvanized steel wire, 1-1/2 inches o.c. Fibered
surface buffed on rubber strips for interior unbuffed on rubber strips for exterior
installations.
1. Semi open construction incorporating a 1/8-inch- thick, PVC spacer on each
wire between each profile shape and rubber strip to allow dirt, grit, and water to
drop through.
2. Profile Shape Finish: Extruded-aluminum, mill finish Solid architectural-quality
brass High-impact, solid PVC in color selected.
3. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations Match Architect's sample
as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Mat Size: As indicated.
I. Surface-Mounted Frames:
1. Tapered Frames: Tapered flexible vinyl edge- aluminum frame members, not
less than 2 inches 1-1/2 inches wide, attached to mat at all 4 edges, with welded
mitered corners.
2. Color: Mill finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
J. Recessed Frames:
1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 6063-T5, T6, or T52.
2. Color: Mill-finish Clear Light bronze Medium bronze Dark bronze Black as
indicated by manufacturer's designations Match Architect's sample as selected
by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Architectural Bronze: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500.

2.2 ENTRANCE TILES

A. Concrete fill and grout materials
1. Provide concrete grout and fill equivalent in strength to cast-in-place concrete
slabs for recessed mats and frames. Use aggregate no larger than one-third fill
thickness.
B. FABRICATION
1. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not
exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed
for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats and grilles are necessary,
space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in
P a g e | 4 of 7
 Section 12 48 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units

without joints.
2. Shop fabricate foot grilles to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide each grille as a single unit; do not exceed
manufacturer’s recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for
maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in grilles are necessary, space
symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.
3. Surface-Mounted Frames: As indicated for permanent surface-mounted
installation, complete with corner connectors, splice plates or connecting pins,
and post installed expansion anchors.
4. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete
with corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices.
a. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame
dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum
number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces
spliced together by straight connecting pins.
5. Coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material with
manufacturer's standard protective coating.

2.3 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.

2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Mill Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated); grind and buff as required to
remove scratches, welding, or abrasions produced in fabrication process.
C. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class
II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
D. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class
I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
E. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/A34 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class
II, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.010 mm or thicker)
complying with AAMA 611.
F. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class
P a g e | 5 of 7
 Section 12 48 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker)

complying with AAMA 611.

2.5 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES

A. Mill finish.
B. Directional Stain Finish: No. 4.
1. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location,
sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats
and frames.
B. Examine roughing in for drainage piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before foot grille and frame and drain pan installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install recessed mat frames. Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for
most effective cleaning action; coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that
swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat.
B. Install recessed foot grilles and frames and drain pans to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions at locations indicated and with top of foot grilles and frames in
relationship to one another and to adjoining finished flooring. Set foot-grille tops at
height for most effective cleaning action. Coordinate top of foot-grille surfaces with
doors that swing across grilles to provide clearance under door.
1. For installation in terrazzo flooring areas, provide allowance for grinding and
polishing of terrazzo without grinding surface of recessed frames. Coordinate
with other trades as required.
2. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and
secure attachment of frames.
3. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper
elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level.
C. Install surface-type units ; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.
1. Anchor fixed surface-type frame members with devices spaced as
recommended by the manufacturer.

P a g e | 6 of 7
 Section 12 48 13
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.3 PROTECTION
A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of
plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring.
Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial
Completion

-END OF SECTION 12 48 13-

P a g e | 7 of 7
 Section 13 49 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 13 49 00
Radiation Protection
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Lead sheet, strip, and plate.
2. Lead glass.
3. Lead-lined building materials and products including the following:
a. Gypsum board.
b. Steel hollow-metal [doors] [and] [door frames].
c. Wood doors.
d. Observation-window frames.
4. Informational signs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Lead Equivalence: The thickness of lead that provides the same attenuation (reduction
of radiation passing through) as the material in question under the specified conditions.
1. Lead equivalence specified for materials used in diagnostic x-ray rooms is
measured at 100 kV unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide materials and workmanship, including joints and fasteners that maintain
continuity of radiation protection at all points and in all directions equivalent to
materials specified in thicknesses and locations indicated.
1. Materials, thicknesses, and configurations indicated are based on radiation
protection design prepared by Owner's radiation health physicist. This design is
available to Contractor on request.
B. Lead-Lined Assemblies: Unless otherwise indicated, provide lead thickness in doors,
door frames, window frames, penetration shielding, joint strips, film transfer cabinets,
and other items located in lead-lined assemblies not less than that indicated for
assemblies in which they are installed.
C. Lead Glazing: Unless otherwise indicated, provide lead equivalence not less than that
indicated for assembly in which glazing is installed.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of radiation-protected areas. Indicate lead thickness or lead
equivalence of components. Show components and installation conditions not fully
dimensioned or detailed in product data.

P a g e | 1 of 8
 Section 13 49 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Show ducts, pipes, conduit, and other objects that penetrate radiation
protection; include details of penetrations.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Rated and Smoke-Control Door and Frame Assemblies: Comply with Division 08
Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" and Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors"
B. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors."

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM B 749.
B. Lead Glass: Lead-barium, polished float glass containing not less than 60 percent heavy
metal oxides, including not less than 48 percent lead oxide by weight.
1. Safety Glass: Laminated float glass.
a. Outer Lite: Clear float glass; thickness as indicated.
b. Interlayer: Clear polyvinyl butyral or cured resin of manufacturer's
standard thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to
bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after
laminating glass lites and installation.
c. Inner Lite: Lead-barium, polished float glass; thickness as indicated.
C. Grout: ASTM C 476, with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
D. Lead-Lined Gypsum Board: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum board complying with
Division 09 Section " Gypsum Board," of width and length required for support spacing
and to prevent cracking during handling, and with a single sheet of lead laminated to the
back of the board.
1. Provide lead sheet lining the full width and length of board and height as
indicated on Drawings.
2. Provide 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide lead strips for wrapping metal stud flanges.
3. Provide 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide lead strips for backing joints.
4. Provide 5/16-inch (8-mm) lead disks for covering screw heads.

P a g e | 2 of 8
 Section 13 49 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

5. Provide lead-headed nails for fastening gypsum board, accessories, and trim to
wood members.
E. Accessories and Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard fasteners and accessories
as required for installation, maintaining same lead equivalence as rest of system.
F. Asphalt Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
G. Asphalt Felt: ASTM D 226.

2.2 LEAD-LINED STEEL HOLLOW-METAL DOORS

A. General: Steel doors complying with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861, except with a single
continuous sheet of lead of as indicated on Drawings and extending from top to bottom
and edge to edge, installed either between back-to-back stiffeners or between stiffeners
and stop face of door.
1. Line inverted channels at top and bottom of doors with lead sheet of same
thickness used in door and close with filler channels to provide flush top and
bottom edges.
2. Shield cutouts for locksets with lead sheet of same thickness used in door. Lap
lining of cutouts with door lining 1 inch (25 mm).
3. Prepare doors to receive observation windows and louvers; cut and trim
openings through doors in factory. Provide removable stops for glazed openings.
4. Provide lead-lined astragals for pairs of doors.
5. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated with 1/16-inch (1.5-
mm) clearance at heads and jambs and minimum clearance at bottom.
6. Finish: Apply manufacturer's factory-applied paint.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by the authorized person on site from the
manufacturer's full range.
B. Lead Door Louvers: Provide louvers with free area as required by the Mechanical
Consultant, of sizes and types indicated. Fabricate from formed-lead sheet or lead
extrusions of not less than lead thickness required for the door in which louver is
installed. Fabricate louvers to be light proof with fixed maze-type blades that maintain
required lead equivalence at all points and in all directions. Factory-fit and assemble
louvers in doors before shipping to the Project site.

2.3 LEAD-LINED STEEL HOLLOW-METAL DOOR FRAMES

A. General: Steel door frames complying with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861, except 0.0667
inch (1.7 mm) thick, and lined with lead sheets of thickness not less than that required
for doors and walls where frames are used.
1. Provide additional reinforcements and internal supports. Install
reinforcements and supports before installing lead lining.
2. Form lead sheet to match frame contour, continuous in each jamb and across
the head, lapping the stops. Form lead shields around areas prepared to receive
hardware. Fabricate lead lining wide enough to maintain an effective lap with
lead of adjacent shielding.
P a g e | 3 of 8
 Section 13 49 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare doors and frames to receive

templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising,
drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates
furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware.".
4. Finish: Apply manufacturer's factory-applied paint.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by the authorized person on site from the
manufacturer's full range.

2.4 LEAD-LINED WOOD DOORS

A. Wood Door Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for
chain of custody.
B. General: Flush solid-core wood doors with lead lining, as indicated on Drawings.
1. Door Construction: Plastic-laminate face, 5 ply, bonded particleboard core.
2. Lead Lining: One or more continuous sheets of lead extending from top to
bottom and edge to edge, constructed either in the core or between the core
and faces, at the manufacturer's option.
3. Lead Lining: One continuous sheet of lead extending from top to bottom and
edge to edge, constructed in the core. Assemble lead lining and core with poured
lead fasteners or steel bolts. Space fasteners not more than 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) from the door edge and about 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Countersink bolt
heads and cover with lead.
4. Comply with Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for grade, faces, veneer
matching, fabrication, finishing, and other requirements unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Quality Standard: WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
6. Grade: Premium.
7. Faces: Plastic laminate complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.
a. Color, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by the authorized person on
site from the manufacturer's full range.
8. Shield cutouts for locksets with lead sheet of same thickness used in door.
Lap-lining cutout with door lining.
9. Prepare doors to receive [observation windows] [and] [louvers]; cut and trim
openings through doors in factory. Provide removable wood stops for glazed
openings.
10. Provide lead-lined astragals for pairs of doors.
11. Factory fit doors to suit frame openings indicated with [1/16-inch (1.5-mm)]
clearance at heads and jambs and minimum clearance at bottom. Factory
machine doors for hardware not surface applied.
C. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products
that do not contain urea formaldehyde.
D. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products
that comply with the testing and product requirements of the Philippines Department of
P a g e | 4 of 8
 Section 13 49 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E. Lead Door Louvers: Provide louvers with free area as required by the authorized person
on site, of sizes and types indicated. Fabricate from formed-lead sheet or lead
extrusions of not less than lead thickness required for the door in which the louver is
installed. Fabricate louvers to be light proof with fixed maze-type blades that maintain
required lead equivalence at all points and in all directions. Factory-fit and assemble
louvers in doors before shipping to the Project site.

2.5 LEAD-LINED OBSERVATION-WINDOW FRAMES

A. General: Fabricate from 0.043-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick, formed-steel sheet or 0.064-inch-
(1.6-mm-) thick aluminum extrusions with mitered corners, welded or bolted with
concealed fasteners.
1. Line with lead sheet formed to match frame contour, continuous in each jamb
and across head and sill, lapping the stops, and fabricated wide enough to
maintain an effective lap with lead of adjoining assemblies.
2. Construct so lead lining overlaps glazing material perimeter by at least 3/8
inch (9.5 mm) and provides removable stops.
3. Form sill with an opening for sound transmission. Offset sound passage to
make opening lightproof and to maintain required lead equivalence at all points
and in all directions.

2.6 INFORMATIONAL SIGNS

A. Informational Signs, General: Fabricate signs by engraving lettering in high-pressure-
laminate engraving stock with contrasting face and core. Machine engrave copy using
high-speed cutters mechanically positioned by master templates for accurately formed
letters, numbers, and symbols.
1. Color: As selected by the authorized person on site from the manufacturer's
full range of colors.
2. Provide copy indicated or as directed. Provide signs of sufficient size to contain
required information.
3. Indicate lead equivalence in millimeters and heights of radiation protection in
inches (millimeters).
B. Rooms Where the Level of Protection Is Uniform Throughout: Provide one sign for each
room indicating lead equivalence of partitions, ceilings, floors, doors, and other portions
of radiation protection enclosure. Indicate height of radiation protection above floor or
indicate that partitions are radiation protected to full height.
C. Rooms Where the Level of Protection is not uniform Throughout: Provide one sign for
each room with different lead equivalences in different locations. Indicate, in tabular
form, lead equivalence of each wall, partition, ceiling, floor, door, and window. Indicate
height of radiation protection above floor or indicate that partitions are radiation
protected to full height. Indicate where lead equivalence changes or is not continuous.
P a g e | 5 of 8
 Section 13 49 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

D. Rooms Where Some Partitions Are without Radiation Protection: Provide one sign for
each partition that contains radiation protection and indicate its lead equivalence.
Indicate height of radiation protection above floor or indicate that partitions are
radiation protected to full height.
E. Rooms Where Only the Door Has Radiation Protection: Provide one sign for each door
indicating its lead equivalence.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF LEAD SHEETS IN CONCRETE FLOOR SLABS

A. Concrete Surfaces: Proceed with installation only after surfaces are clean, dry, and free
of depressions and sharp projections that could damage or penetrate lead sheets.
B. Apply a coat of asphalt mastic or paint to concrete surfaces before installing lead
sheets.
C. Before installing floor lead sheet, place lead strips not less than 7 inches (175 mm) wide
under the base of vertical wall protection. Extend lead strips approximately 3 inches (75
mm) into the shielded room area.
D. Lead Sheet, 1/8 Inch (3 mm) Thick or Less: Install in a single layer with a 2-inch (50-mm)
minimum lap at joints.
E. Lead Sheet More Than 1/8 Inch (3 mm) Thick: Install in two or more layers with a 2-inch
(50-mm) minimum lap at joints, or in a single layer with joints butted and covered with a
4- inch- (100-mm-) wide lead strip of same thickness.
F. Extend the lead sheet at least 12 inches (300 mm) beyond radiation protection in walls
of the room.
G. In floor slabs above shielded rooms where lead sheet is indicated, extend lead sheet at
least 12 inches (300 mm) beyond radiation protection in walls of room below.
H. At door openings, extend lead sheet at least 12 inches (300 mm) beyond radiation
protection in walls and at least 12 inches (300 mm) beyond door opening on both sides
[except where lead-lined thresholds are provided].
I. After installation, apply two asphalt coating on the top surface of the lead sheet and
protect from damage until concrete topping is placed.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install a long edge parallel to supports and lead lining facing supports. Provide blocking
at end joints.[ Install using construction adhesive and supplementary fasteners.]
B. Fastening to Metal Supports: Use steel drill screws space. Install lead strips covering face
of framing and wrap around the flange to cover points of screws.
1. Where possible, install lead-lined gypsum board before installing gypsum
board on other side of partition, and do not fold lead strips back over inside of
flange until after lead-lined gypsum board is applied.
2. Apply lead disks recessed flush with surface of board over heads of screws
securing trim.
P a g e | 6 of 8
 Section 13 49 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

C. Fastening to Metal and Wood Supports: Use steel drill screws spaced. Apply lead disks
over screw heads and recess flush with the surface of board.
1. Install lead strips, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide minimum and same thickness as
lead lining, to face of supports and blocking where joints occur. Secure lead
strips with construction adhesive. Provide shims at intermediate supports.
2. Apply lead disks recessed flush with surface of board over heads of screws
securing trim.
D. Fastening to Wood Supports: Use lead-headed nails spaced. Drill pilot holes to prevent
deforming nails or distorting board. Drive nail heads slightly below the exposed surface.
1. Install lead strips, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide minimum and same thickness as
lead lining, to face of supports and blocking where joints occur. Secure lead
strips with construction adhesive. Provide shims at intermediate supports.
2. Fasten accessories and trim to wood supports with lead-headed nails as
specified above for fastening gypsum board.
E. Two-Layer System: Apply a facing sheet of gypsum board vertically over base sheet
using laminating adhesive recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer.
Offset joints in finish layer from joints in base layer and fasten at top and bottom of
sheet to support finish panel until adhesive has set.
1. Locate fasteners above ceiling or behind wall base and cover fasteners with
lead disks recessed flush with surface of board.
F. Openings: Extend lead-lined gypsum board into frames of openings, lapping lead lining
with lead frames or frame linings at least 1 inch (25 mm). Arrange board around
openings so neither horizontal nor vertical joints occur at corners of openings.
G. Install control and expansion joints where indicated, with appropriate trim accessories.
Install lead strip on face of framing, extending across joint, and lap with lead lining of
gypsum board.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED DOORS AND DOOR FRAMES

A. Install lead-lined steel doors and door frames according to Division 08 Section "Hollow
Metal Doors and Frames."
1. Apply a coat of asphalt mastic or paint to lead lining in door frames where lead
will come in contact with masonry or grout.
B. Install lead-lined wood doors according to Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors."
C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with
door manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Lap lead lining of frames over lining in walls at least 1 inch (25 mm).
E. Line astragals with lead sheet.
F. Hardware: Line covers, escutcheons, and plates to provide effective shielding at cutouts
and penetrations of frames and doors. See Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for
other installation requirements.

P a g e | 7 of 8
 Section 13 49 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.4 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED OBSERVATION WINDOWS

A. Install observation windows according to manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
1. Apply a coat of asphalt mastic or paint to lead lining in frames where lead will
come in contact with masonry or grout.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, and anchored securely in place to
structural support.
C. Install the lead side of the frame on the radiation side of the wall. Lap lead lining of
frames over lining in walls at least 1 inch (25 mm).
D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with
manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF PENETRATING ITEMS

A. At penetrations of lead linings, provide lead shields.
B. Provide lead linings, sleeves, shields, and other protection in thickness not less than that
required in assembly being penetrated.
C. Secure shields at penetrations using adhesive or wire ties but not penetrating fasteners
unless indicated on Drawings.
D. Outlet Boxes and Conduit: Cover or line with lead sheet lapped over adjacent lead lining
at least 1 inch (25 mm). Wrap conduit with lead sheet for a distance of not less than 10
inches (250 mm) from box.
E. Duct Openings: Unless otherwise indicated, line or wrap ducts with lead sheet for
distance from partition/ceiling equal to three times the largest opening dimension. Lap
lead sheet with adjacent lead lining at least 1 inch (25 mm).
F. Piping: Unless otherwise indicated, wrap piping with lead sheet for a distance of not less
than 10 inches (250 mm) from point of penetration.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Perform tests and inspections after radiology equipment has been
installed and placed in operating condition. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and
replace radiation protection that inspection reports indicate does not comply with
specified requirements.

-END OF SECTION 13 49 00-

P a g e | 8 of 8
 Section 22 40 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

SECTION 22 40 00
Plumbing Fixtures
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specifications Section shall apply to work of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings and accessories, appliances,
appurtenances, equipment and supports associated with plumbing fixtures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: Describes a plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be
approached, entered, and used by physically handicapped people.
B. Accessory: Device that adds effectiveness, convenience, or improved appearance to a
fixture but is not essential to its operation.
C. Appliance: Device or machine designed and intended to perform a specific function.
D. Appurtenance: Device or assembly designed to perform some useful function when
attached to or used with a fixture.
E. Equipment: Device used with plumbing fixtures or plumbing systems to perform a
certain function for plumbing fixtures but that is not part of the fixture.
F. Fitting: Fitting installed on or attached to a fixture to control the flow of water into or
out of the fixture.
G. Fixture: Installed receptor connector to the water distribution system, that receives and
makes available potable water and discharges the used liquid or liquid-borne wastes
directly or indirectly into the drainage system. The term "Fixture" means the actual
receptor, except when used in a general application where terms "Fixture" and
"Plumbing Fixture" include associated trim, fittings, accessories, appliances,
appurtenances, support, and equipment.
H. Roughing-In: Installation of piping and support for the fixture prior to the actual
installation of the fixture.
I. Support: Device normally concealed in building construction, for supporting and
securing plumbing fixtures to walls and structural members. Supports for urinals,
lavatories, and sinks are made in types suitable for fixture construction and the
mounting required. Categories of supports are:
1. Carrier: Support fixed to wall construction for wall-hung fixture.
2. Reinforcement: Steel plate built into wall construction, for securing fixture to
wall.

P a g e | 1 of 4
 Section 22 40 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

J. Trim: Hardware and miscellaneous parts, specific to a fixture and normally supplied with
it and required to complete fixture assembly and installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of plumbing fixture specified, including fixture and trim,
fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, supports, construction
details, dimensions of components, and finishes.
B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of each fixture and accessory proposed for use as
required by the authorized person on site before starting. Only approved samples may
be used.
C. Types: It is the Plumbing Fixture Supplier's responsibility to provide the exact type of
accessory suitable to the condition of installation.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Plumbing fixtures and trim shall be of first class quality, furnished by one manufacturer.
The installation shall be complete with all necessary accessories as specified and
approved.
B. All fixtures shall be free from imperfections, true to lines, angles, curves and color,
smooth, watertight, and complete in every aspect.
C. All fixtures specified to be of vitreous ware, shall be fired vitreous chinaware of the best
quality, non-absorbent and burned so that the whole mass is thoroughly fused and
vitrified, which when fractured will show a homogenous mass, close grained and free
from pores. The glazing and fixtures shall be thoroughly fused and united to the Body,
without discoloration, chips, or flaws, and shall be free from craze. Warped or otherwise
imperfect fixtures will not be accepted.
D. Design Concept: The photocopies of models indicate types of plumbing fixtures and are
based on the specific descriptions, manufacturers, models, and numbers indicated.
Plumbing fixtures having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may
be considered provided that deviations in dimensions, operation, color or finish, or
other characteristics are minor and do not change the design concept or intended
performance as judged by the the authorized person on site.
E. Plumbing Fixtures and Faucets shall comply with the following standards; or equivalent
standard as approved by the Architect: ANSI A112.19 for fixture dimensions; ANSI
A117.1 and 112.18 for faucets.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING

A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering.
B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in a dry location.

P a g e | 2 of 4
 Section 22 40 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance and with requirements and as approved by the authorized person
on site.

2.2 FITTINGS, EXCEPT FAUCETS

A. General: Unless otherwise specified, provide fittings fabricated of brass, with polished
chrome plated finish, US made unless otherwise indicated.
B. Lavatory and Service Sink Supplies and Stops: As per selected faucet manufacturer's
compatible units.
C. Lavatory Traps: Cast-Brass P-Trap with clean-out, with wall flange and strainer.
D. Supply and drain plumbing service fittings not listed above shall be as selected by the
the authorized person on site.
E. Provide fittings specified as part of a fixture description, in lieu of fitting requirements
above.

2.4 PLUMBING FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, categories and types as required for wall-hanging fixtures
specified, and wall reinforcement.
B. Support categories are:
1. Chair Carriers: Supports with steel pipe uprights for wall-hanging fixtures.
C. Support Types: Provide support of category specified, of type having features required
to match fixture.
D. Provide supports specified as part of fixture description, in lieu of category and type
requirements above.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for potable cold water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping
systems.

B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be
installed.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATION
A. Install plumbing fixtures and specified components.
B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures.

P a g e | 3 of 4
 Section 22 40 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb.
B. Install floor mounted, floor outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.
C. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely.
D. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
E. Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework.
F. Secure supplies behind the wall or within wall pipe space.
G. Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each fixture.
H. Install traps on fixture outlets except for fixtures having integral traps.
I. Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew
resistant, silicone sealant in accordance with sealing requirements specified in Division-7
Section "Joint Sealers". Match sealant color to fixture color.

3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of Division 15. The
drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following
are specific connection requirements:
1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and
plumbing equipment specified.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after
units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then
retest. Repeat the procedure until all units operate properly.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, having controls.
C. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
D. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by
the authorized person on site.

- END OF SECTION 22 40 00-

P a g e | 4 of 4
 Section 22 43 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 22 43 00
Healthcare Plumbing Fixture
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following healthcare fixtures and specialties to supplement
conventional plumbing fixtures specified in other Division 22 Sections:
1. Healthcare water closets.
2. Healthcare showers.
3. Healthcare bathing units.
4. Bedpan washers.
5. Clinic sinks.
6. Plaster sinks.
7. Scrub sinks.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 22 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures" for emergency showers
and eyewash units.
2. Division 22 Section "Residential Plumbing Fixtures" for residential fixtures for
use in healthcare facilities, but not requiring special healthcare fixture
attributes.
3. Division 22 Section "Commercial Water Closets" for conventional water
closets, flushometer valves, carriers, and seats for use healthcare facilities, but
not requiring special healthcare fixture attributes.
a. Division 22 Section "Commercial Urinals" for urinals for use in
healthcare facilities.
4. Division 22 Section "Commercial Lavatories" for lavatories for use in
healthcare facilities, but not requiring special healthcare fixture attributes.
5. Division 22 Section "Commercial Sinks" for sinks for use in healthcare facilities,
but not requiring special healthcare fixture attributes.
6. Division 22 Section "Commercial Showers, Receptors, and Basins" for showers
for use in healthcare facilities, but not requiring special healthcare fixture
attributes.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures and faucets to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.

P a g e | 1 of 10
 Section 22 43 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and

Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Servicing and adjustments of flushometer valves, healthcare bathing
units and bedpan washer/sanitizers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 HEALTHCARE WATER CLOSET

A. Healthcare Water Closets: Wall mounted.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable product.
2. Bowl:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.
b. Material: Vitreous china.
c. Type: Siphon jet.
d. Style: Flushometer valve.
e. Height: Standard.
f. Rim Contour: Elongated with bedpan lugs or slots.
g. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. (4.8 L) per flush.
h. Spud Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).
3. Support:
a. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.
b. Description: Waste-fitting assembly as required to match drainage
piping material and arrangement with faceplates, couplings gaskets, and
feet; bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension
coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.
c. Water-Closet Mounting Height: Standard.
B. Healthcare Water Closets: Floor mounted, floor outlet.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable product.
2. Bowl:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.
b. Material: Vitreous china.
c. Type: Siphon jet.
d. Style: Flushometer valve.
e. Height: Standard.
f. Rim Contour: Elongated with bedpan lugs or slots.
g. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. (4.8 L) per flush.
h. Spud Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).

2.2 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves.
P a g e | 2 of 10
 Section 22 43 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, or

comparable product.
2. Standard: ASSE 1037.
3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
4. Features: Integral check stop, backflow-prevention device, and outlet-tube-
mounted bedpan washer.
5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components
6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.
7. Style: Exposed.
8. Consumption: 1.28 gal. (4.8 L) per flush.
9. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1 (DN 25).
10. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32), extended length.

2.3 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable.
2. Standard: IAPMO Z124.5.
3. Material: Plastic with antimicrobial agent.
4. Type: Commercial (heavy duty).
5. Shape: Elongated rim, open front.
6. Hinge: Check.
7. Hinge Material: Non-corroding metal.
8. Color: White.

2.4 HEALTHCARE SHOWERS

A. Healthcare Showers: Accessible.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable product by one of the following:
a. BS Method.
2. Standard: ANSI Z124.1.2 and complying with ICC A117.1 for roll-in shower
compartments.
3. Nominal Size: 60 by 36 inches (1524 by 915 mm).
4. Surround: One piece.
5. Surround: One piece.
6. Bathing Surface: Slip resistant according to ASTM F 462.
7. Color: White.
8. Drain Location: Center.
9. Accessibility Options: Include grab bar and bench.
10. Drain: Grid, NPS 2 (DN 50), complying with ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

P a g e | 3 of 10
 Section 22 43 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.5 HEALTHCARE SHOWER FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Healthcare Shower Faucets: Pressure-balance mixing valve.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable.
2. Faucet:
a. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and ASSE 1016.
b. Body Material: Solid brass.
c. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
d. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.) unless otherwise indicated.
e. Mounting: Concealed.
f. Operation: Single-handle, push-pull control.
g. Check Stops: Check-valve type, integral with or attached to body; on
hot- and cold-water-supply connections.
h. Indicators: For hot and cold water.
3. Shower Head:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
b. Shower Head Material: Metallic with chrome-plated finish.
c. Spray Pattern: Adjustable.
d. Shower-Arm, Flow-Control Fitting: 1.5 gpm (5.7 L/min.).
e. Temperature Indicator: Integral with faucet.

2.6 HEALTHCARE BATHING UNITS

A. Healthcare Bathing Units: Side entry, adjustable height.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable.
2. Fixture: Plastic-tub, institutional bath fixture with integral controls.
a. Tub Size: 60 by 30 inches (1524 by 762 mm).
b. Controls: Vacuum breakers on supplies, thermostatic mixing valve, tub
fill spout, and hand-held shower head.
3. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) with shutoff valve.
4. Drain: Manufacturer's standard NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) with tailpiece.
5. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) cast-brass P-trap, waste to wall, and wall
flange complying with ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. Include combined drain
piping if two drains.
6. Unit Electrical Characteristics:
a. Volts: 240.
b. Phase(s): One.
c. Hertz: 60.

P a g e | 4 of 10
 Section 22 43 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

2.7 BEDPAN WASHERS

A. Bedpan Washers: Wall mounted, compact.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable.
2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
3. Hose Assembly: 48-inch- (1220-mm-) long rubber or vinyl hose with self-
closing, hand-held spray nozzle, wall bracket, and hook.
4. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001, atmospheric, wall mounted.
5. Shutoff Valve: Wall-mounted, cross-handle supply stop upstream of vacuum
breaker
6. Connecting Piping: Concealed.
7. Finish: Polished chrome-plated finish on exposed metal parts.
8. Supply Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).

2.8 BEDPAN WASHING EQUIPMENT

A. Bedpan Washers/Sanitizers: Recessed Wall mounted.
1. Manufacturers: Available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable product by one of the following:
a. STERIS Corporation.
3. Fixture:
a. Construction: Cast-iron chamber and P-trap waste assembly with spray
nozzles and stainless-steel front panel and cover box.
b. Controls: Electric, 120-V ac, automatic operation with timer, solenoid
valves, and circuit breaker.
c. Door Mechanism: Foot-pedal operation.
4. Supply Connections: NPS 1 (DN 25) cold water and NPS 3/8 (DN 10) hot water.
5. Drain Piping: NPS 3 (DN 80) P-trap and soil pipe.
6. Atmospheric Vent Connection: NPS 2 (DN 50).
7. Mounting Hardware: Matching fixture-mounting arrangement.

2.9 CLINIC SINKS

A. Clinic Sinks: Floor mounted.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable.
2. Fixture: Bottom-outlet, vitreous-china, siphon-jet, flushing-rim, service sink.
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1.
b. Nominal Size: [27 by 20 inches (685 by 510 mm)] >.
c. Color: White d. Rim Guards: Stainless steel on front.
3. Sink Base: [10 inches (254 mm)] high; cast terrazzo if required.
4. Flushometer Valve.
P a g e | 5 of 10
 Section 22 43 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

5. Faucet.
6. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.

2.10 PLASTER SINKS

A. Plaster Sinks: Wall mounted vitreous china.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable.
2. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASMA A112.19.2/CSA B45.1.
b. Type: Utility sink.
c. Nominal Size: 24 by 22 inches (610 by 560 mm) with back.
d. Color: White.
e. Faucet Holes: One in back.
f. Drain: Grid, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) to NPS 2 (DN 50)
adaptor.
3. Faucet.
4. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article
5. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) chrome-plated brass; 0.045-inch- (1.1-mm-)
thick waste to interceptor; interceptor to wall; and wall flange complying with
ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
6. Plaster Interceptor:
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide or comparable.
b. Description: Cast-iron or steel body and removable cover with acid-
resistant-enameled interior lining and outside coating; removable,
corrosion-resistant metal screens or strainer; and NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) inlet
and outlet.
7. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type III sink carrier with white-enameled-steel
brackets.

2.11 SCRUB SINKS

A. Scrub Sinks Vitreous china, wall mounted.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable.
2. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1.
b. Nominal Size: 28 by 22 inches (710 by 560 mm) with back or ledge with
one faucet hole.
c. Color: White.
d. Drain: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).
3. Faucet.
4. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.
P a g e | 6 of 10
 Section 22 43 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

5. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article.

6. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type I, Type II, or Type III sink carrier.

2.12 SINK FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water. B. Sink
Faucets: Manual-operation mixing valve
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable
2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
3. Configuration: Hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with
supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink
receptor.
4. Body Type: Centerset
5. Body Material: Solid brass
6. Finish: Chrome plated.
7. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 gpm (8.3 L/min.)
8. Control: Elbow, 6-inch (152-mm) handle(s).
9. Control: Foot pedal.
10. Mounting Type: Back/wall, exposed.
11. Spout Type: Rigid, gooseneck.
12. Vacuum Breaker: Not required for hose outlet.
13. Spout Outlet: Plain end.

2.13 LAMINAR-FLOW, FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or
comparable.
B. Description: Chrome-plated brass, faucet-spout outlet that produces non-aerating,
laminar stream. Include external or internal thread that mates with faucet outlet for
attachment to faucets where indicated and flow-rate range that includes faucet flow.
C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for faucet-spout-outlet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

2.14 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-
supply piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.
D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve
with inlet connection matching supply piping.
E. Operation: Wheel handle.
P a g e | 7 of 10
 Section 22 43 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

F. Risers: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube.

2.15 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
B. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/2 DN 40 tailpiece.
C. Trap:
1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).
2. Material: Chrome-plated, one-piece, cast-brass trap with swivel 0.029-inch-
(73-mm-) thick tubular brass wall bend; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall
flange.
3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch-
(0.30-mm-) thick stainless-steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.

2.16 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install healthcare plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings
B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste
piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible
fixtures.
C. Install floor-mounted healthcare water closets on bowl-to-drain, connecting fitting
attachments to piping or building substrate.
D. Install counter-mounted fixtures in and attached to casework.
E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to
water-distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces
behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for
operation.
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if supply stops are not specified with
fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Division 22 Section
"General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
F. Install flushometer valves on healthcare water closets.

P a g e | 8 of 10
 Section 22 43 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

G. Install flushometer valves for accessible healthcare water closets, with lever handle
mounted on wide side of compartment.
H. Install toilet seats on healthcare water closets.
I. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet
spouts, if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if
required.
J. Install laminar-flow, faucet-spout fittings in faucet spouts where laminar-flow fittings
are specified.
K. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
L. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
M. Set healthcare showers in leveling bed of cement grout.
N. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste
piping of accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Plumbing
Piping Insulation."
O. Seal joints between healthcare plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using
sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture
color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
P. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished
locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for
Plumbing Piping."
Q. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and
vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
R. Comply with requirements for water piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic
Water Piping."
S. Comply with requirements for soil and waste drainage piping and vent piping specified
in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
T. Comply with requirements for atmospheric vent piping specified in Division 22 Section
"Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
U. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste
piping of accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Plumbing
Piping Insulation."

3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
healthcare plumbing fixtures, fittings, and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow.
C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

P a g e | 9 of 10
 Section 22 43 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After installing healthcare plumbing fixtures inspect and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean healthcare plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers'
recommended cleaning methods and materials.
C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
D. Do not allow use of healthcare plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless
approved in writing by Owner.

-END OF SECTION 22 43 00-

P a g e | 10 of 10
 Section 26 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

SECTION 26 50 00
Lighting
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Light fixtures, including lamps and ballasts, of the following types: Verify Location.
1. 32 W (2" X 4").
2. 31 W (2" X 4").
3. Downlight.
4. Wall Mounted Lighting.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): UL 1598 - Luminaires.
C. ANSI/UL Standard 8750, (c/CSA/us) 1st Edition - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment
for use in Lighting Products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. Underwriters' Laboratories labeling.
C. Fixture Schedule: Manufacturer's standard fixture schedule, coordinated with project
requirements and the fixture schedule on the Drawings.
D. Verification Samples: Full size unit of each fixture type, including lamps, ballasts and
supports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each fixture and component, including lamps.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compliance: Provide fixtures that comply with the following and additional local
regulations.
1. Finish areas designated by the authorized person on site.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are
approved by the authorized person on site.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
B. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques,
workmanship and appearance.
1. Finish areas designated by the authorized person on site.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are
approved by the authorized person on site.

P a g e | 1 of 3
 Section 26 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging, out of extreme heat or direct
sunlight, until ready for installation. Do not switch the fixture ON until any and all
protective peel is removed from reflectors and/or lenses.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate locations of lighting fixtures with ceilings, ceiling mounted components, fire
protection and mechanical components, and partitions.
B. Maintain environmental conditions within limits. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements and as approved by the authorized person on
site.

2.2. PRODUCTS (Refer to drawings for exact location)

1. 32 W (2" X 4").
2. 31 W (2" X 4").
3. Downlight.
4. Wall Mounted Lighting.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate
preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify the authorized person on site
of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the methods
recommended by the manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions including the following:
1. Install fixtures in proper relationship with adjacent construction and ceiling
grid and components.
2. Install fixtures with clearances recommended by manufacturer.
3. Install lamps and test for proper operation.

P a g e | 2 of 3
 Section 26 50 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace
damaged products before Substantial Completion.

- END OF SECTION 26 50 00 –

P a g e | 3 of 3
 Section 31 31 16
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

Section 31 31 16
Termite Control
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, and Division-1 Specifications Section shall apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide used motor oil or Lentrek TC termiticide, as herein specified for all areas and
surfaces in contact with the ground.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment until excavating, filling and grading operations
are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations.
B. To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soils or during
inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil
toxicant manufacturer.

1.4 DELIVERY & STORAGE

A. Insecticides shall be delivered to the project site in sealed and labeled containers as
supplied by manufacturer or formulator. Temporary storage of insecticides utilized at
the project site will be made unlikely. Provisions are to be made. Separation from water
systems and buildings should be made sufficient to prevent contamination by runoff,
percolation, windblown particles, or vapors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements and as approved by the authorized person on
site.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION
A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of
treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except
previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations.
B. Application Rates: Apply as per manufacturer’s recommended rates.
1. Under slab-on-grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed:

P a g e | 1 of 2
 Section 31 31 16
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

a. Apply termiticide treatment to soil in critical areas under slab, including

entire inside perimeter inside of foundation walls, along both sides of
interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit
penetrating slab, and around interior column footers.
b. Apply termiticide treatment as an overall treatment underslab and
attached slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel.
c. Apply termiticide treatment for each foot of depth from grade to
footing along outside edge of building. Dig a trench 150mm to 200mm
wide along outside of foundation to a depth of not less than 300mm.
Punch holes to top of footing at not more than 300mm o.c. and apply
termiticide.
C. Under basement structures, treat soil along exterior and interior walls of foundation
with shallow footings as specified above for exterior of slab-on-grade structures.
D. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at
rate of 15.14 liters (4 gals.) per 3.048 linear meters (10 linear feet) of penetration.
E. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has
been applied. Remove signs where areas are covered by other construction.
F. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape
grading, or other construction activities following application.

- END OF SECTION 31 31 16 –

P a g e | 2 of 2
 Section 32 14 40
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

SECTION 32 14 40
Stone Paving
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Extent of stonework is indicated on drawings and schedules.
B. Type of stonework required in this section:
1. Paving blocks.
2. Cobble Paving.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of stone, stonework accessory, and
other manufactured product required.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit cutting and setting drawings indicating sizes, dimensions,
sections and profiles of stones; arrangement and provisions for jointing, supporting,
anchoring, and bonding stonework; and details showing relationship with, attachment
to, and reception of, related work.
C. Submit the following samples:
1. Stone samples in form of sets for each color, grade, finish, type and variety of
stone required and consisting of stones not less than 300 square mm. Include 2
or more stones in each set of samples showing the full range of variations in
appearance characteristics to be expected in completed work.
2. Colored pointing mortar and grout samples for each color required showing
full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single Source Responsibility for Stone: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type and variety
of stone from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties, including the capacity to cut and finish material
without delaying the progress of the work.
B. Single Source Responsibility for other Materials: Obtain each type of stone accessory,
sealants and other materials from one manufacturer for each product.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed stonework
similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this project. Submit list of
completed projects; include project names, addresses, and names of Architects and
Owners

P a g e | 1 of 5
 Section 32 14 40
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

D. Field-Constructed Mock-up: Prepare mock-ups for the following types of stonework.

Purpose of mock-ups is for further verification of selections made for color and finish
under sample submittals and establishing standard of quality for aesthetic effects
expected in completed work. Build mock-ups to comply with following requirements:
1. Locate mock-ups on site where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
the authorized person on site.
2. Erect mock-ups in presence of the authorized person on site.
3. Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed stone
stonework.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.
B. Store and handle stone and related materials.
C. Store stone on wood skids or pallets, covered with non-staining, waterproof membrane.
Place and stack skids and stones.
D. Protect stored stone from weather with waterproof, non-staining covers or enclosures,
but allow air to circulate around stones.
E. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in dry location.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protect stonework during erection as follows:
1. Prevent staining of stone from mortar, grout, sealants and other sources.
Immediately remove such materials from stone without damage to latter.
2. Protect stone from droppings of mortar and sealants.
3. Protect completed stonework and stonework in progress to comply with the
following requirements:
a. Temperature ranges indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures
existing at time of installation.
b. At 40 deg. F (4.4) deg. C) to 32 deg. F (0 deg. C) protect stonework from
rain or snow at least 24 hours by covering with non-staining weather-
resistive membrane.
c. At 32 deg. F (0) deg. C) to 25 deg. F (-4 deg. C) cover stonework
completely with non-staining weather resisting membrane.
B. Environmental Conditions for Sealants: Do not proceed with installation of sealants
when ambient and substrate temperatures are outside the limits permitted by sealant
manufacturer or below 40 deg. F (4.4 deg. C) or when joint substrates are wet due to
rain, condensation or other causes.

P a g e | 2 of 5
 Section 32 14 40
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated applicable to each
type of material required.

2.2 STONE PAVERS

A. Provide the following:
1. Paving Stone & Cobble Stone
a. Surface : Flat
b. Size : 100mm x 200mm
c. Thickness : 50mm
d. Pattern : As indicated on drawings.
e. Color : As selected by the Architect
f. Location : Garden

2.3 MANUFACTURER
A. Subject to compliance with requirements and as approved by the authorized person on
site
2.4 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A
108.1 and as specified below:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type 1.
2. Sand: ASTM C 144.
3. Water: Potable.

2.5 STONE FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate stonework in sizes and shapes.
B. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stones for anchors, fasteners, supports and lifting
devices as indicated or needed to set stonework securely in place; shape beds to fit
supports.
C. Cut stones to produce pieces of thickness, size and shape indicated or required and
within fabrication tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if none,
stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs.
D. Control depth of stones and back-check to maintain minimum clearances indicated
between backs of stones and surfaces or projections of structural members, fireproofing
(if any), back-up walls and other work behind stones.
E. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at 90 degree angle to face, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Quirk-miter corners, unless otherwise indicated; provide for cramp anchorage in top
and bottom bed joints of corner pieces.

P a g e | 3 of 5
 Section 32 14 40
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

G. Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings and similar features as
required to accommodate contiguous work.
H. Finish exposed faces and edges of stones.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Require Installer to examine surfaces to receive paving blocks. Do not proceed with
installation until surfaces and conditions.

3.2 SETTING PAVING STONE, GENERAL

A. Excavate: Unsuitable, unstable, or unconsolidated subgrade material and compact the
area which has been cleared then back fill and level with dense graded aggregate
suitable for sub-base material.
B. Edge restraint: Edge restraints are absolutely necessary to prevent the interlocking
paving blocks from moving sideways. provide edge restraints with curbs or gutters,
although the foundation of the curbs must not interfere with the proper laying of the
concrete block. Edge restraints are not limited to curbs and gutters. For other edge
restraints alternatives, consult the manufacturer.
C. Sand Cushion: Spread bedding sand to an approximate depth of 2 inches between the
restraints or curbs.
D. Paving: Positioning of the first block demands extra care. To give the blocks the required
interlocking pattern, the block must be placed at a correct angle against a firm starting
edge such as a curb or any other restraint available. The paving blocks must fit closely
together. If joints begin to open, the blocks should be tapped in place with a rubber
mallet or wooden blocks.
E. Edge Fitting: Where required, cut paving blocks to fit gaps in corner and edges. Where
gaps are less than 1 5/8” (40mm) they can be filled with sand cement mortar not leaner
than 1:4 (1 bag cement, 4 parts sand).
F. Vibration: When there is enough area to make vibration worthwhile-like 15-20 square
meters, vibrate the blocks to their final level with a small plate compactor. The vibrator
should be guided over the entire area staying a meter or so away from any
understrained edges which may move 2 or 3 passes may be required.
G. Sand Joints: After the initial vibration, sand is broomed over the surface and is vibrated
again into the joints. Surplus sand is then removed.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Ground Base Compaction: Using a portable compactor machine or manual compactor of
adequate weight, compact the ground soil base. The base should at depth below the
required finished level equal to the thickness of the paving stone plus 30mm for the
thickness of the compacted bedding sand. The pavement must not be level but have a
slope to shed surface water.
P a g e | 4 of 5
 Section 32 14 40
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

B. The Sand Bed: For a good compaction you need an even but loose depth of 40mm. To
avoid compacting the sand before laying your pavers, work on a small areas at a time,
spreading sand and laying paving stone before moving on to the next area. Suitable
pieces of timber or pipe can be used to keep your spreading board at the right height.
C. Laying the Pavers: Work to the pattern you have chosen by building it forward in rows.
As you lay each paver, do it carefully so the even bed of sand is not disturbed. Lower
each paver against the face of each neighbor. This is called butt jointing but will actually
leave a small gap between pavers. This gap will be needed as you will see later. As you
work you can stand or sit on the pavers you have already laid. But avoid putting any
weight on the leading row of pavers as they can tilt or slip and ruin your even bed of
sand.
D. Sweep in Sand: With the first compaction on the installed paving stone completed,
sweep some more fine dry sand across the paving and work it into the gaps as you go.
Compact the surface again using the same implement as before. This time you are
forcing sand down into the gaps. It’s this second compaction that completes the locking
of the pavers in place.
E. The edge restraint locks the pavers at the edge. Without the restraint the edge pavers
could loosen and slip out of position. Dig a strench along the paving edge. It must be
deeper than the bedding sand. Fresh concrete mixture is then shoveled in place and
formed against the pavers. When it dries, the installation is completed.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace stonework of the following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged stones.
2. Defective joints.
3. Stones and joints not matching approved samples and field-constructed
mockups.
4. Stonework not complying with other requirements indicated.
B. Replace in manner which results in stonework matching approved samples and field-
constructed mock-ups, complying with other requirements and showing no evidence of
replacement.
C. Clean stonework not less than 6 days after completion of work, using clean water and
stiff bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents, cleaning
compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods which could
damage stone.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Fabricator
and Installer.

- END OF SECTION 32 14 40 –

P a g e | 5 of 5
 Section 32 90 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

SECTION 32 90 00
Planting
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 All of the provisions of the General Conditions and Special Conditions of the
Contract apply to this section as though written in full herein.
1.2 Work under this section shall include all labor, materials, and equipment’s
specified or incidental necessary to complete fully all work of fine grading,
planting, fertilizing, maintenance, clean-up and other work related thereto.
1.3 Work not included under this section includes rough grading, paving,
benches, and any work marked “existing”.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIALS

A. Quality and size of all plants shall be No. 1 grade. They shall be fresh, vigorous, of
normal growth, free of diseases, insects, insect egg and larvae.
B. Sizes of plants shall be as stated on the planting plan. No root bound or undersized
materials shall be allowed.
C. Pruning shall not be done, prior to delivery except by special approval.
D. Inspection of plant materials shall be responsibility of the Landscape Contractor, and he
shall have secured permits or certificates prior to delivery of plants to site.
E. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approved or rejected, at the place of growth
and on the project site, at any time before or during progress of work, for size, variety,
condition, latent defects and injuries. Rejected plants shall be removed from the site
immediately.
F. Protect plant from sun, wind and rain at all times before planting.
G. Substitutes will not be permitted unless specifically approved in writing.
H. Nomenclature conforms to customary nursery usage.
I. Quantities shall be furnished as needed.

2.2 PLANTS
A. Dwarf Palm.
B. Eugenia.
C. Kalachuchi.
D. Mahogany.
E. San Francisco.
F. Wedelia.
G. White Angel.

P a g e | 1 of 3
 Section 32 90 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WORK PROCEDURES shall follow customary practices, shall be as directed and as follows:
A. Fertilizing:
1. All planting areas indicated on plans shall be scarified to a depth of 150mm
below finish grade.
B. Planting:
1. Plant all materials as soon as the site is available and weather conditions are
suitable. Do not plant when weather conditions are unfavorable to good work.
2. Ground Cover Installations.
a. Plant ground covers in areas so designated on plans.
b. Grade ground cover areas to finish grades, filling as needed or
removing surplus dirt and floating areas to a smooth, uniform grade as
indicated on grading plans.
c. Where no grades are shown, areas shall have a smooth and continual
grade between existing or fixed controls (such as walks, curbs, catch
basins, elevations at steps or buildings) and elevation shown on plans.
Roll, scarify, rake and level necessary to obtain true, even round cover
surfaces. All finish grades shall meet approval of the Owner or his
representative before ground covers and plants are planted.
d. Finish grade so that ground cover areas will be 2” below adjacent walk
and curb grades, after water settling. Rake, cultivate, float and roll until
ridges and depressions disappear and areas are in smooth and uniform
condition.
e. Plant rooted cuttings, pot or can stock at spacing indicated on plans.
f. Smooth soil about plants and leave areas in neat and clean conditions.
Do not pile soil around crown of any plants.
g. Water with a light spray.
3. Tree and Shrub Planting:
a. Finish grade shrub areas to 25mm below top of adjacent walks, curbs,
and headers and prepare the entire beds in the same manner as for
Ground Cover, above.
b. Stake plant locations and secure approval before excavating pits.
c. Excavate pits with vertical sides for all plants, as directed. Tree pits
shall be of sizes shown on injury to balls of earth or roots, and shall be of
such depth that, when planted, the crown of the plants shall bear the
same relation.
d. Guy trees with not less than three guys per tree to conform to
customary practices and as directed by the authorized person on site.

P a g e | 2 of 3
 Section 32 90 00
Proposed Felipe Abrigo Memorial Hospital
Ward 9-A, Guian, Eastern Samar

3.2 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant and each portion of lawn are
planted, and shall continue for at least three (3) months after completion of all
planting.
B. Maintain trees and plants in vigorous, thriving condition by watering, cultivating,
pruning, spraying and other necessary operations. Keep all shrub area free from weeds
by cultivating or hand digging as necessary.
C. Maintain ground cover areas by watering, weeding, replanting and other necessary
operations. Keep them free from weeds and leave them in clean and acceptable
condition by the end of the maintenance period.
D. Maintain grass areas by watering, weeding, replanting, mowing, trimming, edging, and
other necessary operations, mowing shall be done in such a manner that no deep ruts
are made in the lawn areas shall be filled.
E. Protect grass and all plants against damage, including erosion and trespass, and provide
proper safeguard as needed.
F. Apply commercial fertilizer to all lawns, at the rate of thirty (30) pounds per 1000 square
feet, at least one (1) week before end of maintenance period.
G. Final inspection of lawns and planting will be made at the conclusion of the
maintenance period. Written notice requesting the same shall be submitted by the
Landscape Contractor at least seven (7) days before the anticipated date.

3.3 GUARANTEES AND REPLACEMENTS

A. Guarantee grass, shrubs and ground cover until end of maintenance period of at least
three (3) months.
B. Guarantee all trees to live in a healthy condition for one (1) year after planting. Dead or
healthy trees shall be replaced as soon as possible after their condition has deteriorated
within this period of one year.
C. Replace as soon as weather permits all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous
condition as noted at the end of three (3) months maintenance period.
D. Plants used for replacement shall be the same kind and size as specified in the plant list.
E. They shall be furnished, planted and fertilized as specified.

3.4 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of all construction and before final acceptance, the Landscape
Contractor shall broom-clean the entire paved area. All tools, surplus materials,
equipment, debris etc., shall be removed and the site shall be left in a neat and
acceptable condition such.

- END OF SECTION 32 90 00 –

P a g e | 3 of 3
 Technical Data Specifications
CEILING TILES

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

1. Supply of lightweight gypsum-based 600mm x 600mm ceiling tiles complete
and ready for installation. The installing contractor shall be responsible for the
supply, installation and coordination of all work and the installing contractor
shall do so in compliance with all requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES:
The following references and guidelines shall be followed:
1. ASTM C635: Standard Specifications for Metal Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings.
2. ASTM C636: Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Suspension
System for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.
3. ASTM E84: Fire Hazard Classification.
4. CISCA Ceiling Systems Installation Handbook

1.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:

1.The ceiling tiles are designed to be installed into a suspended 600mm x
600mm ceiling system consisting of main tees and cross tees connected
together.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

1. Installer’s qualifications: The installer shall have adequate number of years of
successful experience in the installation of ceiling suspension systems on
projects.
2. Source quality control: Manufacturer will provide test certification for the
ceiling tile.

1.5 RESPONSIBILITY:
1. The installing contractor shall perform all the work in this section, and will
assume responsibility for coordinating the installation with associated trades.

1.6 SUBMITTALS:
1. Samples: Submit ceiling tile panel and suspension system main and cross tees
for acceptance.
2. Shop drawings: Technical Data Specifications
A. Reflected ceiling plans: Submit ceiling system layout to indicate ceiling
modules, and related lighting and mechanical systems.
B. Assembly drawings: Indicate module dimensions, accessory
attachments, and installation of system components.
 Technical Data Specifications
CEILING TILES

1.7 SCHEDULING:
1. Installation schedule should be properly coordinated at site in order to suite
with the overall construction schedule.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

1. Delivery of materials: Product is to be delivered in its original unopened
packaging, clearly labeled with Manufacturers’ name, item description,
specification number, type and class, as applicable. The product shall be handled
and transported in non-damaging packaging in order to prevent damage or
excessive stress.
2. Inspection: Upon arrival, the product is to be inspected for any damage during
shipment and freight claims are to be filed and/or replacement materials are to
be requested immediately. Freight claims for damage during shipment, and/or
replacement materials should be filed as required.
3. Storage: Storage of the product at the jobsite should be as short as possible
and environmental conditions should be as near possible to those specified for
occupancy. Excess humidity during storage can cause possible warp, sag, or poor
fit after installation. In order to prevent damage, boxes should not be
removed from the pallets and stringers.
4. Handling: Manufacturers’ product is to be handled in such a manner so as to
ensure against cracking, distortion, or physical damage of any kind.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

1. Existing conditions: Include specific alteration work requirements for project.
2. Environmental requirements: Building shall be enclosed with all windows and
exterior doors in place and glazed, and the roof watertight before installation of
ceiling system. Wet work shall be in place and completed. Appropriate
ventilation should be in place and used during installation process.
3. Coordination with other work:
a. General: Coordinate with other work supported by or penetrating
through ceiling, including mechanical and electrical work and partition
systems.
b. Mechanical work: Ductwork above the ceiling system shall be complete
and permanent heating and cooling systems operating.
c. Electrical work: Installation of conduit above suspension system shall
be complete before installation of suspension system.
4. Protection: Protect completed work above the ceiling system from damage
during installation of suspension system components.
 Technical Data Specifications
CEILING TILES

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
1. Lightweight gypsum-based acoustic / non-acoustic ceiling panels:
A. Shall be manufactured using lightweight gypsum-based non-acoustic and
formed into 600mm x 600mm lay-in ceiling panels. Panels are produced using an
automated production process consistent thickness throughout as per
manufacturers’ requirement and approved by the authorized person on site
.
B. Accessories:
a. Wall moulding: 7/8x7/8x12long angle shape of pre-painted steel.
b. Panels with cutouts: For incandescent light, sprinklers, cameras or
speakers with integral trim to conceal the edge of the panel cutout
(specify hole sizes and locations for each type).
2. Suspension system components:
A. General: Standard 15/16ASTM C635, (Intermediate) (Heavy Duty)
classification, commercial quality cold-rolled steel; exposed surfaces pre-finished
in manufacturers standard color.
3. Air distribution components:
A. Standard air diffusers: Shall conform to the manufacturers requirements and
approved by the authorized person on site.

2.2 TOLERENCES (Fabrication):

Unless otherwise stated on the manufacturers drawings, fabrication tolerances
are as follows:
1. Dimensional overall lengths, widths, squareness, chords, radii or diameters ±
1/8.
2. Straightness along an edge surface ±1/8per linear foot.
3. All outside corners 1/16to 1/8.
4. A minimum 3-degree draft angle shall be allowed on all returns, setbacks, and
reveals/grooves.

2.3 PERFORMANCE
1. Suspension system: (Intermediate) (Heavy Duty) classification designed to
support ceiling assembly as indicated on project drawing with maximum
deflection of 1/360.
2. Acoustical performance values are approximately the rating of manufacturers’
lightweight gypsum-based acoustical ceiling tile.
3. Surface burning: Class A finished ceiling panel surfaces shall have flame spread
/ smoke development values of less than 10/15.
 Technical Data Specifications
CEILING TILES

3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
1. Examine areas to receive materials for conditions that will adversely affect
installation.
2. Work is not allowed to start until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3. Work to be concealed: Verify work above ceiling system is complete and
installed in manner that will not affect layout and installation of system
components.

3.2 PREPARATION:
1. Field dimensions: Installer must verify actual field dimensions prior to
installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION:
1. Standard reference: Install in accordance with ASTM C636, CISCA
recommendations and local building codes.
2. Manufacturers reference: Install in accordance with manufacturers current
printed recommendations.
3. Drawing reference: Install in accordance with approved shop drawings.
4. Hanger wires:
i. Spacing: Space hanger wires on main tees a maximum of 120
mm o.c. attaching hangers directly to structure above.
ii. Limitations: Do not support wires from mechanical and/or
electrical equipment, piping, or other equipment occurring above
ceiling.
5. Accessories: Install accessories as applicable to meet requirements.
6. Allowance tolerances: Per ASTM C636.

3.4 CLEANING:
1. Maintenance: Perform any necessary cleaning maintenance with non-solvent-
based commercial cleaner on painted panels or suspension components.
2. Immediately remove any corrosive substances or chemicals that may attack
finishes (e.g. wallpaper paste).
3. Removal of debris: Remove all debris resulting from work of this section.

- END OF THE SECTION -

 Technical Data Specifications
PRE-PAINTED ROOFING SHEETS
PRE-PAINTED ROOFING SHEETS

1.0 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all pre-painted metal sheet materials, tools and
equipment, plant including labor required in undertaking the proper installation
complete as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.

2.0 Material Requirements

All pre-painted metal sheet and roofing accessories shall be oven baked painted true to
profiles indicated on the Plans as per approval of the authorized person on site.

2.1 Pre-painted Roofing Sheets

Pre-painted roofing sheets shall be fabricated from cold rolled galvanized iron
sheets specially tempered steel. It shall conform to the material requirements
defined in PNS 67:2014 Hot-dip Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets for Roofing -
Specification. Profile section in identifying the architectural molded rib to be
used is as follows: Regular corrugated Quad-rib, Tri-wave, Rib-wide, Twin-rib,
and others. Desired color shall be subject to the approval of the authorized
person on site.

Gutters, Valleys, Flashings Hip and Ridge roll shall be fabricated from gauge 24
(0.600 mm thick) cold-rolled plain galvanized iron sheets specially tempered
steel. Profile section shall be as indicated on the Plans. Fastening hardware shall
be of galvanized iron straps, rivets or]-bolts. G.I. straps are of 0.500 mm thick x
16 mm wide x 267 mm long (gauge 26 x 5/8" x 10- 1/2") and standard rivets.
Base metal thickness shall correspond to the following gauge designation
available locally as follows:

1. Base Metal Thickness Designated Gauge

0.400 mm thick Gauge 28
0.500 mm thick Gauge 26
0.600 mm thick Gauge 24
0.800 mm thick Gauge 22

2. Protective coatings Thickness

1. Zinc {minimum} 14 microns
(100 gm/m ) 2

2. Paint coatings
Top coat 15.20 microns
Bottom coat 6.8 microns
 Technical Data Specifications
PRE-PAINTED ROOFING SHEETS
3. Base Metal Thickness Overall thickness with protective coats
0.400 mm 0.427-451 mm
0.500 mm 0.532-551 mm
0.600 mm 0.638-651 mm

4. Length of roofing sheets - available in cut to length long span length up to

18.29 meters.
5. Special length and thickness are available by arrangements.

3.0 Construction Requirements

Before any installation work is commenced, the top face of the purlins should be
checked for proper alignment. Correct the alignment as necessary.

3.1 Processing of Pre-painted Metal Sheets

Fabricated metal sheets is cleaned and pretreated in preparation for painting.
Surface contaminants are removed using a suitable alkaline cleaner. The sheet is
then pretreated with a chromate pretreatment. The pretreatment is a uniform,
continuous deposit applied in a manner. A minimum of two coats of paint are
applied to both the face side and back side of the sheet. A corrosion inhibitive
primer and a top coat shall be used on the sheet. The primer is a uniform
continuous film, compatible with the subsequently applied top coat. It is applied
to each surface at a thickness specified by the paint manufacturer with a
minimum of 0.2 mm thick. Top coat thickness varies depending on paint type
and end use. The face side top coat has excellent long-term outdoor weathering
characteristics.

3.2 Handling/Lifting/Positioning of Sheets

Sheets shall be handled carefully. Lift all sheets or sheet packs onto the roof
frame with the overlapping down-turned edge facing towards the side of the
roof where installation will commence, otherwise sheets will have to be turned
end-to-end during installation.

3.3 Installation Procedure

The laying of the roofing panels should begin on the end of the building away
from the prevailing wind. Start roofing installation by placing the first sheet in
position with the downturned edge in line with other building elements and
fastened to supports. Fasteners should have corrosion resistance at least
equivalent to the expected life of the base material. Place the downturned edge
of the next sheet over the edge of the first sheet. Continue the same procedure
for subsequent sheets until the whole roofing area is covered and/or (adopt
installation procedure provided in the instruction manual for each type of
Architectural molded rib profile section). Pre-painted metal sheet should not
come in direct contact with wet concrete. Concrete's high alkalinity attacks the
aluminum, causing the coating to peel. It shall also not be placed in contact with
 Technical Data Specifications
PRE-PAINTED ROOFING SHEETS
copper, lead, or the water run-off. Electrochemical reaction between these
elements and the aluminum-zinc alloy coating will lead to premature corrosion
of the coating. For walling applications follow the procedure for roofing and
allow a minimum end lap of 100 mm for vertical walling. For panel lapping,
requirements depend on the product installation guide of a specific type of pre-
painted metal sheet as per approval of the authorized person on site. Provide
sealant, butyl tape or caulking along the lap edge. Specifications of the sealant
and butyl tape shall be as per manufacturer's recommendation of the authorized
person on site.

3.4 Gutters, Valleys, Flashing ridge and Hip rolls

Gutters, valleys, flashing ridge and hip rolls shall be fastened where indicated on
the Plans by self-tapping screws or galvanized iron straps and rivets. Always
begin flashing installation from bottom and work up, so that flashings are lapped
on top of the lower flashings.

3.5 End Laps

In case handling or transport consideration requires the use two (2) or more end
tapped sheets to provide full length coverage for the roof run, install each line of
sheets from bottom to top or from eave line to apex of roof framing. Provide 150
mm minimum end lap.

3.6 Anchorage/Fastening
Pre-painted steel roofing sheets shall be fastened to the wood purlins with
standard length G.I. straps, rivets or J-bolts. For steel frame up to 4.5 mm thick
use self-drilling screw No. 12 by 35 mm long hexagonal head with neoprene
washer. For steel support up to 5 mm thick or more use thread cutting screw No.
12 by 40 mm long hexagonal head with neoprene washer. Side lap fastener use
self-drilling screw No. 10 by 16 mm long hexagonal head with neoprene washer.
Valley fastened to lumber and for walling use self-drilling wood screw No. 12 by
25 mm long hexagonal head with neoprene washer. Valleys fastened to steel
supports use self-drilling screws hexagonal head with neoprene washer. Drill size
is 5 mm diameter.

3.7 Cutting of Sheets

In cutting pre-painted steel roofing sheets and accessories, place the exposed
color side down. Cutting shall be carried out on the ground and not over the top
of other painted roofing product. Power cutting or drilling to be done or carried
out on pre-painted products already installed or laid in position, the area around
holes or cuts shall be masked to shield the paint from hot fillings.
 Technical Data Specifications
PRE-PAINTED ROOFING SHEETS
3.8 Storage and Protection
Pre-painted steel roofing, walling products and accessories should be delivered
to the jobsite in strapped bundles. Sheets and/or bundles shall be neatly stacked
in the ground dry and if left in the open it shall be protected by covering the
stack materials with loose tarpaulin. Bundles should be stored above ground at a
slight angle. Removing installation debris and metal fines due to drilling and
cutting from the sheet surface and avoiding exposure of insulation to the
weather.
 Technical Data Specifications
EXTERIOR WINDOW SHUTTER

EXTERIOR WINDOW SHUTTER

(Typhoon Proof Window Protection)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Supply and installation of a typhoon proof window shutter that functions in the exterior
side of the window. The installing contractor shall be responsible for the supply,
installation and coordination of all works including all necessary hardware and
consumables and shall do so in compliance with the requirements.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirement: Design shutter to withstand;
1. Positive and negative design wind loads acting normal to wall plane in
accordance with the Building Code with deflection of any member.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show materials, layout, dimensions, profiles, fasteners and anchors,
hardware, finishes, and interface with adjacent construction.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's standard colors or custom colors.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one sample, minimum size 12
inches (300 mm) square, represents actual product, color, and textures.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened packaging, with labels
clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
C. Store materials in a clean, cool and dry area. Do not leave unopened shutters in direct
Technical Specifications Exterior Window Shutter 2 sunlight.
D. Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
 Technical Data Specifications
EXTERIOR WINDOW SHUTTER
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Submit and provide warranty on structural components and finish under normal
weather conditions. Hardware is warrantied from manufacturer’s defects. Warranty is
limited to the original purchaser.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER

A. Substitutions: Permitted, should meet required minimum specifications. B. Requests for
substitutions will be considered in accordance with the approval of the authorized
person on site.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Shutters can be made of the following options:
1. Wood.
2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC).
3. Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS).
4. Aluminum.
5. Others (with equivalent quality and characteristic) Style:
a. Standard two panel.
b. Single panel.
c. Extra panel (3 panel or Tri panel).
d. Custom rail location.

2.4 HARDWARE
A. As specified by the manufacturer’s standard, corrosion resistant finish Technical
Specifications Exterior Window Shutter 3
B. Fasteners: Stainless, corrosion-resistant, type best to application

2.5 WARRANTY
A. As specified by the manufacturer or one (1) year minimum.

PART 3 INSTALLATION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until shutters, surfaces and walls where they will be installed
have been properly prepared.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
 Technical Data Specifications
EXTERIOR WINDOW SHUTTER
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop
drawings.
B. Adjust operable units for smooth unobstructed operation.
C. Installers should be trained and approved by the authorized person on site
D. Set shutters plumb, level and rigid, free from warp and twist.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage by weather and other work until Date of
Substantial Completion.
B. Touch-up and repair damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

- END OF SECTION -
 Technical Data Specifications
WALL COVERINGS AND CORNER GUARDS
PROTECTIVE HANDRAILS, WALL GUARDS,
WALL COVERINGS AND CORNER GUARDS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following wall protection system:
1. Handrails
2. Wall Guards
3. Wall Coverings
4. Bumper Guards
5. Corner Guards

B. Related Sections:
1. Section 10 26 13 - Corner Guards
2. Section 10 26 16 - Bumper Guards
3. Section 10 26 23 - Protective Wall Covering
4. Section 10 26 33 - Door and Frame Protection
5. Section 09 22 00 - Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. Submit samples for verification of design suitability, color, finish, and
accessory attachment and alignment.
B. Product Data
1. Data sheet illustrating product dimensions, options, and related components.
2. Installation instructions.
C. Test reports from a qualified independent laboratory.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer should have vast experienced in the production of wall protection
products having successful in-service performance.
B. Color Control: Provide extruded and molded components that meet visual and
colorimetric evaluation of color.
 Technical Data Specifications
WALL COVERINGS AND CORNER GUARDS
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage: Store wall protection products in original packaging. Protect from weather,
extreme temperatures, and moisture.
1. Maintain temperature during storage between 40°- 100°F (4°- 38°C).
2. Store materials flat to prevent twisting or sagging of cartons.
B. Handling: Take adequate measure to prevent damage to materials. Avoid exposure of
products to direct sunlight.

1.06 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Ambient Conditions: Do not install wall protection products until installation areas are
enclosed and weatherproof.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturer subject to the approval of the authorized person on site.

2.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Multifunction wall protective system (handrail, bumper guard, corner guard, wall
coverings and wall guard) with a continuous aluminum retainer, flexible impact cushion,
and snapped-on plastic cover. Full length mounting system consists of an extruded
aluminum bracket with machined plates at wall returns and corners. System includes
molded wall returns and corners. Select from the manufacturer's standard or custom
colors.

2.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Flammability Characteristics: High impact components (PVC, Vinyl or equivalent)
1. Class A interior wall finish (NFPA 101 Life Safety) when tested in accordance
with ASTM E84.
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
2. Classification of HB when tested in accordance with ASTM D635.
B. Stain Resistance: High impact components (PVC, Vinyl or equivalent)
1. Material to be tested for stain resistance to various chemical reagents in
accordance with ASTM D543.
C. Bacterial and Fungal Growth: High impact components (PVC, Vinyl or equivalent)
1. Material must not support bacteria or fungal growth when tested in
accordance with
ASTM G21 and ASTM G22.
D. Impact Resistance: High impact components (PVC, Vinyl or equivalent)
1. Izod impact strength ASTM D256 method A notched, 23.8 ft-lbs/in average
with no break.
2. Charpy impact strength ASTM D6110 notched, 26.1 ft-lbs/in average with no
break.
 Technical Data Specifications
WALL COVERINGS AND CORNER GUARDS
2.04 MATERIALS
A. Cover: Extruded high impact material (PVC, Vinyl or equivalent), nominal 0.080”
thickness, colored throughout.
B. Aluminum Retainer: Extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T6 as described in ASTM B221,
nominal 0.080” thickness.
C. Wall Mounting System: Extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5 as described in ASTM B221,
nominal 0.080” (2.03) thickness. Wall return and corner plates machined from 1/8” (3)
aluminum plate.
D. Molded Accessories: Injection molded thermoplastic. Impact Cushion: Extruded
thermoplastic, 70 durometer Shore A.

PART 3 INSTALLATION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls for availability of backing.
B. Verify application of wall finishes.

3.02 PREPARATION 3
A. Surface Preparation: Clean substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Acclimate materials to building conditions for at least 24 hours prior to installation.
B. Install wall protection products.

3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed material from damage by other trades. Use materials that will not
mark, stain, or leave residue on the product.

- END OF THE SECTION -